INTRODUCTION 


TO 


Latin  Composition 


REVISED  AND  ENLARGED 


WITH  INTRODUCTORY  EXERCISES    ON  ELE- 
MENTARY  CONSTRUCTIONS 


BY 

WILLIAM  F.  ALLEN 

Professor  in  the  University  of  Wisconsin 


\>^  no  inxxt     ^ 


THE 


^^  OP 

'Uirl7EIlSlT7l 


BOSTON 

PUBLISHED   BY   GINN,   HEATH,   &  CO. 

1883 


/^o 


) 


c<&> 


.^Entered  accordirg  ta  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1880,  by 

•  William  Francis  Allen, 

in  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington, 


:# 


J.  S.  Gushing, 

Superintendent  of  Printing, 

loi  Pearl  St.,  Boston. 


NOTE  TO  REVISED  EDITION. 


AFTER  the  present  revised  edition  of  this  book  was  announced 
last  summer,  and  when  a  part  of  it  was  already  in  type,  it  was 
decided  to  prefix  to  the  original  Lessons  an  introductory  portion,  to 
include  the  more  elementary  constructions  of  Latin  syntax.  This 
portion  (Part  L),  with  the  revision  of  the  entire  book  consequent 
upon  the  change  of  plan,  has  been  executed  by  my  brother,  Rev. 
J.  H.  Allen,  of  Cambridge,  Mass.,*  with  the  valuable  co-operation 
of  Mr.  John  Tetlow,  Master  of  the  Girjs'  Latin  School  in  Boston ; 
aided  by  the  skilful  and  acute  criticism  of  Prof.  Peck  of  Cornell  Uni- 
versity. Especial  pains  have  been  taken  to  facilitate  the  work  of  the 
earlier  Lessons  by  a  copious  use  of  Oral  Exercises  (interlined)  ;  and 
very  full  references  have  been  given  throughout  to  the  three  Latin 
Grammars  most  in  use.  The  experiment  has  also  been  tried  of  mark- 
ing the  long  vowels  in  the  Latin  words  employed,  including  those 
known  to  be  long  "by  nature,"  and  those  understood  to  be  lengthened 
in  practice  before  the  combinations  nf^  ns,  and  gn.  Some  changes 
of  arrangement  in  Part  IL,  with  the  condensation  or  transposition  of 
several  topics,  have  resulted  from  the  change  of  plan  above-men- 
tioned ;  but  these  will  not,  in  general,  prevent  the  use  of  the  two 
editions  together  where  desired.  Considerable  additions  have  been 
made  to  the  Vocabulary,  which  includes  a  few  scores  of  familiar 
words  not  employed  in  the  exercises,  in  order  to  facilitate  such  addi- 
tional practice  as  teachers  may  find  advisable. 

W.  F.  A. 

Madison,  Wis.,  June,  1880. 

*  Lecturer  on  Ecclesiastical  History  in  Harvard  University. 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION. 


THESE  exercises  are  primarily  designed  as  a  training  in  Latin 
Syntax.  It  is  taken  for  granted  that  the  pupil  has  gone 
thoroughly  through  the  Latin  I^essons,  or  some  other  method  of 
equal  scope.  No  pains  are  taken,  therefore,  to  illustrate  the  com- 
mon rules  of  agreement  and  government.  On  the  other  hand,  I 
have  not  aimed  to  introduce  rare  constructions  and  mere  idiomatic 
expressions.  It  has  seemed  to  me  that  the  regular  principles  of 
prose  construction  should  be  the  only  object  of  attention  at  this 
stage  of  advancement ;  and  that  the  rarer  idioms  will  be  acquired 
with  little  effort  by  those  who  follow  out  an  extended  course  of 
Latin  reading. 

Nearly  all  the  sentences  in  the  writtea  Exercises  are  taken, 
without  change,  from  classic  authors.  These  sentences  are  trans- 
lated as  literally  as  practicable ;  still,  it  has  been  impossible  to 
avoid  a  considerable  variety  of  expression,  so  that  the  Vocabu- 
lary will  be  found  to  contain  quite  a  wide  range  of  words  and  mean- 
ings, considering  the  whole  number  of  sentences.  I  have  thought  it 
best  not  to  provide  special  vocabularies  for  the  several  Lessons,  nor 
many  explanatory  notes :  it  has  been  my  desire  to  have  the  student 
acquire  the  habit  of  referring  to  grammar  and  vocabulary  for  gen- 
eral principles  in  the  choice  of  words  and  constructions,  rather  than 
depend  upon  special  directions  in  each  case. 

It  is  believed  that  these  exercises  can  be  taken  up  by  any  scholar 
who  has  gone  thoroughly  through  any  of  the  usual  courses  of  Latin 
Lessons.  Still,  except  in  the  case  of  mature  or  unusually  capable 
pupils,  I  should  advise  that  some  time  should  first  be  devoted  to 
mere  translation.  The  familiarity  with  vocabulary  and  construc- 
tions thus  acquired  will  be  the  best  preparation  for  writing.  I 
should  let  a  class  go  through  portions  of  Caesar,  and  perhaps  of 
other  authors,  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent  with  accuracy,  and  with 
very  little  parsing.  Then  I  should  take  up  parsing  again,  and  intro- 
duce the  writing  of  exercises.  However,  all  such  rules  must  vary 
with  different  classes  and  teachers. 

University  of  Wisconsin, 
Madison,  Wisconsin,  June,  1870. 


CONTENTS. 


PART    FIRST. 
I. —  Elements  of  the  Sentence. 

Lesson  Page 

1.  Subject  and  Predicate i 

2.  Object-Accusative 3 

3.  Interrogative  Forms        .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .5 

4.  Use  of  Relatives 7 

5.  The  Passive  Voice lo 

6.  Infinitive  and  Subject- Accusative 12 

7.  Participles:  Ablative  Absolute 14 

II.  —  Constructions  of  Cases. 
I.  —  Object-Cases, 

8.  Direct  Object:  Accusative 16 

9.  Dative  of  Indirect  Object 18 

10.  Genitive  and  Ablative 19 

2. —  With  Adjectives, 

11.  Genitive  with  Adjectives 21 

12.  Dative  with  Adjectives 22 

13.  Ablative  with  Adjectives 23 

3.  —  Miscellaneous  Uses, 

14.  Uses  of  the  Accusative .  25 

15.  Dative:   Idiomatic  Uses 26 

16.  Uses  of  the  Ablative 28 

17.  Time  and  Place 30 

18.  Gerundive  Constructions     .        .        .        .        •        .        .  31 

III.  —  Moods  and  Tenses. 

19.  Subjunctive  :   Independent  Uses     ......  33 

20.  Sequence  of  Tenses 35 

21.  Conditional  Sentences 37 

22.  Time-Clauses 39 

23.  Purpose  and  Result .        .42 


vi  Contents. 

PART   SECOND. 

I.  —  Substantive  Clauses. 

(Indirect  Discourse.^  ^ 

Lesson  ^  Page 

24.  Accusative  and  Infinitive.  —  i 44 

25.  Accusative  and  Infinitive.  —  2 46 

26.  Accusative  and  Infinitive.  —  3 48 

27.  Special  Constructions      .  ' 49 

28.  Indirect  Questions 51 

29.  Other  Forms  of  Substantive  Clause 53 

30.  Impersonal  Verbs 56 

II.  —  Miscellaneous  Constructions. 

31.  Modifications  of  the  Predicate 58 

32.  Use  of  Tenses 60 

33.  Wishes  and  Commands 62 

34.  Use  of  Participles 63 

35.  Gerund,  Gerundive,  and  Supine 65 

36.  Use  of  Conjunctions 68 

III.  —  Case-Constructions. 

37.  Apposition 69 

38.  Uses  of  the  Genitive 71 

39.  Genitive  after  Verbs 73 

40.  Dative  with  Verbs 74 

41.  Dative  with  Passives 76 

42.  Special  Uses  of  the  Dative         .        .        .        ...  78 

43.  Special  Uses  of  the  Accusative 80 

44.  Special  Uses  of  the  Ablative 81 

45.  Relations  of  Time 85 

46.  Relations  of  Place       .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .  87 

IV.  —  Adjectives  and  Pronouns. 

47.  Adjectives  :   Special  Uses 88 

48.  Derivatives  :    Possessives 90 

49.  Pronouns  :   Reflexive  and  Intensive 91 

50.  Relative  Pronouns      , 93 

51.  Correlatives •        .        .94 

52.  Indefinite  Pronouns 96 


Co7ttents,  vii 

V.  —  Subordinate  Clauses. 

Lesson  Page 

53.  Simple  Conditional  Clauses 99 

54.  Other  Conditional  Clauses loi 

55.  Lmplied  Conditions .        .        .  103 

56.  Comparative  and  Concessive  Clauses 105 

57.  Temporal  Clauses 106 

58.  Special  Uses  of  Cum 108 

59.  Causal  Clauses no 

60.  Final  Clauses 112 

61.  Consecutive  Clauses 114 

62.  Clauses  of  Characteristic   .  .• 117 

63.  Infinitive  Clauses 118 

64.  Intermediate  Clauses 120 

65.  Dependent  Conditional  Clauses 122 

VI.  —  Additional. 

66.  The  English  Potential        .        ,     ' 125 

67.  Further  Uses  of  the  Relative 130 

68.  Supplementary  Exercises 132 

69.  Comparative  Forms  of  Speech       .        .        •        .        .        •  135 

VOCABULARY. 


PART    FIRST./V     OP  THE      . 

(T7ITIVEESIT7 

I.  —  Elements   of   the  .  Sentence. 
Lesson  /i.  /  ,    .     .    _ 

•  Subject  and  Predicate, 

1.  Learn  the  definitions  of  Subject  and  Predicate: 
§§  172-174  (G.  192,  except  the  first  three  paragraphs, 
193.  Rem.,  194;  H.  356.  i,  2;  358,  360,  368). 

Note.  —  The  references  are  to  the  sections  of  Allen  &  Green- 
ough's  Latin  Grammar,  revised  edition.  Parallel  references  are 
also  given,  in  parenthesis,  to  Gildersleeve's  Grammar  (G.)  and  to 
Harkness's  (H.),  *' Standard"  edition. 

2.  Learn  the  meaning  of  the  following  Prepositions, 
observing  the  Case  to  be  used  with  each  :  — 

Among  or  Between,  inter  (ace).  Through,  per  (ace). 

By  or  From  (away  from),  a 9  ob  (abL),  To  (towards),  ad  (acc.).*^ 

From  (out  of),  e,  eoc  (abl.).  Under,  sub.  ^ 

In  or  On,  in  (abl.).  With,  cunfi  (abl.).*^ 

Into,  in  (ace).  Without,  sine  (abl.) 

a.  The  preposition  ad  must  be  used  to  express  motion  to.  Thus, 
in  the  sentence  ''  he  goes  to  the  river, -^  use  ad  with  the  Accusative  ; 
but,  in  "I  give  a  book  to  the  boy,^''  use  the  Dative. 

b.  When  sub  indicates  rest  in  a  place,  it  takes  the  Ablative ; 
when  it  indicates  motion  towards,  and  in  such  phrases  as  sub 
vesperum,  towards  evening,  it  takes  the  Accusative. 

c.  The  preposition  cum  is  regularly  used  to  express  in  C07npany 
with.  Thus,  in  the  sentence  *'he  is  walking  with  his  sister,''^  the 
ablative  is  used  with  cum;  but  in  "he  was  killed  with  a  sword, ^"^ 
the  ablative  alone  is  used. 


2  Latin  Composition, 

3.  The  learner  is  supposed  to  be  familiar  with  the 
.elementary  Rules  of  Agreement :  viz., 

1.  Of  the  Noun,  in  Apposition  or  as  Predicate  :  §  183 
(G.  319;  H.  362,  363)  ; 

2.  Of  the  Adjective  with  its  Noun:   §§  186,  187  (G.  285, 

286;  H.  438,  439); 

3-  Of  the  Ver.'3  V  i'h  its  Subject-Nominative  :  §  204  (G.  202  ; 
H.  460). 

4.  The  order  of  words  in  a  Latin  sentence  is  com- 
paratively free ;  but  the  following  Rules  may  serve  as  a 
guide  to  the  beginner  :  — 

1.  In  general,  put  the  Subject  first  and  the  Verb  last. 

2.  Any  very  emphatic  word  may  be  first  or  last. 

3.  An  Adjective,  except  for  emphasis,  follows  the  noun ;  but 
may  precede  the  preposition  with  its  noun  :  as,  inult'is  in  locis, 

4.  Put  the  Adverb  immediately  before  the  word  which  it 
modifies. 

Oral  Exercises. 

Note.  —  The  examples  marked  for  oral  practice  may  be  written 
out,  at  the  pleasure  of  the  teacher ;  or  they  may  conveniently  serve 
for  exercises  at  the  blackboard.  They  are  designed  to  enable  the 
learner  to  avail  himself,  rapidly  and  easily,  of  the  knowledge  he  has 
acquired  by  study  of  the  Grammar ;  and  to  aid  him  in  acquiring  the 
command  of  a  stock  of  useful  words,  without  the  labor  of  incessantly 
turning  to  a  dictionary.  In  writing  these  and  the  accompanying 
exercises,  it  is  advisable  to  mark  all  the  long  vowels. 

I.   The  queen's  daughter  is  beautiful.  —  2.  The  anchors  are 

regina  fllia  pule  her  aneora 

large,"  crooked,  and  strong.  —  3.    The  gates  of  the  town  are 

■mdgnus       curvtis  validus  porta  oppidutn 

open.  —  4.    In  the  woods  were  many  wild-creatures.  —  5.   The 

apertus.  silva  multus  /era 

moon  was  bright  in  a  clear  sky.  —  6.  The  lofty  gates  of  Corinth 

luna  lucidus  serenus  eaeluvt  alius  Corinthus 

a.  Insert  "and." 


Object- Accusative,  3 

were  shut. —  7.   We  are  boys,  not  men.  —  8.   Seneca  **  was  a 

clausus  puer       tion      vir 

famous  philosopher  among  the  Romans. 

clams        philosophus  Ronianus 

Examples  from  Caesar. 

I.   All  Gaul  is  divided  into  three  parts.  —  2.   Of  all  these  the 

ovinis  Gallia         divisus  ires      pars  hie 

bravest  are  the  Belgae.  —  3.  This  district  was-called^  Tigurmus ; 

fortis  pagiis  (m.)  voco'^ 

for  every  Helvetian  state  is  divided  into  four  districts.  —  4.  This 

nam  omnis      Helvetius     civitas  gtiattuor 

thing  is  announced  to-the-Helvetii''  through  testimony. 

res  enuntio^  indicium. 

Write  in  r.atin. 

1.  The  son  of  ^neas  was  Ascanius. 

2.  Anger  is  a  great  fault. 

3.  Athens  was  the  native-city  of  many '^  great  men.  •    . 

4.  Few  slaves  were  faithful  to  [their]  ^  masters  (dat.) . 

5.  Great  men  are  the  gift  of  the  good  gods. 

6.  The  moon  and  stars  were  bright  in  the  clear  sky. 

7.  You  are  men,  not  boys. 

8.  The  forces  of  the  Romans  were  great. 


Lesson  2.         ' 

Object-Accusatire. 

I.  Learn  the  definitions  and  construction  of  the 
Accusative  as  the  object  of  transitive  verbs:  Gr.  §  177, 
with  Cy  comparing  §  237  (G.  327  and  329.  Rem.  i  ;  H. 
371.  I.  i)  and  2),  also  371.  iil). 

Rule.  —  The  Accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object  of 
a  transitive  verb  :  as,  Caesar  G  alii  am  super avit. 

a.  Proper  names  not  translated  are  the  same  in  Latin  as  in  English.  —  b.  The 
small  figures  denote  the  conjugation  of  the  verb.  —  c.  Words  connected  by 
hyphens  are  to  be  rendered  by  a  single  word  (here  by  the  dative).  —  d.  Insert 
"  and  "  :  ^  208.  c  (G.  483.  i ;  H.  440.  i,  N.).  —  e.  Words  in  brackets  are  not  to  be 
translated. 


4  Latin  Composition. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   We  see  the  moon  and  stars  in-the-night.  —  2.   Horatius 

video  2  Stella  noctu 

sustains  a  great  storm  of  danger."  —  3.  We  enter  a  great  wood, 

sustineo^  procella        periculum.  intro^ 

blac^  with- darkness,^  near  the  town  (ace.) .  —  4.   A  lazy  sailor 

ater  tenebrae       prope  oppidum  ignavus  nauta 

blames  the  winds  and  waves.  —  5 .   You  give  good  counsels  to 

culpo'^  ventus  unda  do"^      bonus     cdnsilium 

[your]   son.  —  6.  True  glory  holds  a  place  among  the  stars. 

fllius  verus     gloria     habeo^  locus 

—  7.   We   praise   the   good,''  we    blame    the   bad.  —  8.    The 

laudo'^  (plur.)  viiupero^  tnalus 

Romans   move   [their]    camp*^  from  the  plain.  —  9.    A  cruel 

moveo^  castra  campus  saevus 

wolf  tears  the  tender  lamb. —  10.   The  slaves  fill  great  bowls 

lupus  lacero^  tener      agnus  servus  impleo'^  poctilum 

with-wine.  —  11.   The  weary  sailors   enter  a  narrow  strait.  — 

vlnum  fessus  angustus  /return 

12.    Chattering  girls  tell  many  [things]  "  among  themselves/ 

garrulus    puella  narro^  se 


Examples  from  Caesar. 

I.   The  Helvetii  excel  the  rest-of^  the  Gauls  in-manhood.* — 

praecedo^         reliquus  Gallus  virtus 

2.   The  ^dui  send  ambassadors  to  Caesar.  —  3.   This  district 

niitto  3  legatus  pagus 

had-slain  Lucius  Cassius   the  consul,  and  had-sent  his   army 

i7iterficio^  is  exercitus 

under  the  yoke.*'  —  4.    Caesar  held-back  his  [men]  from  battle. 

jugunt  contineo^      suus  a      proelium 

—  5.    Caesar  takes  his  right-hand;    calls    Dumnorix   to    him; 

prendo^  dextra  Dumnorig-  se 

sends-for   [his]   brother.  —  6.    He  undertook  the  embassy  to 

adhibeo^  f rater  is  suscipio^  legatio  (f.) 

the  states. 

clvitas 

a.  When  a.  noun  is  limited,  as  here,  by  an  adjective  and  a  genitive,  the  usual 
order  is  (i)  adjective,  (2)  genitive,  (3)  noun.  —  b.  Ablative. —  c.  See  ^  188,  with 
Remark  (G.  195.  Rem.  i ;  H.  441.  i).  —  d.  The  Latin  word  for  camp  is  the  plural 
of  castrum.  —  e.  Neuter  plural. — f.  Or,  to  one  another :  see  \  196. /(G.  212; 
H.  448.  i). — g.  See  §  193  (G.  287.  Rem.;  H.  440.  N.2). —  h.  Ablative:  \J  253 
(G.  398;   H.  424).  —  /.  Ace:  \  152.  c  (G.  413.  419;   H.  43^.  i). 


Interrogative  Forms, 

"Write  in  !Latin. 

1.  Slaves  fear  a  cruel  master. 

2.  The  black"  darkness  of  the  forest  terrifies^  small  boys. 

3.  We  owe  a  great  [sum  of]  money  to  the  jeweller. 

4.  Few  [men]  love  glory  more  than  life.  ° 

5.  We  often  see  wolves  in  the  forest. 

6.  We  praise  the  good  less  than  we  blame  the  bad. 

7.  The  Tynans'^  praise  the  beautiful  queen. 

8.  We  have  riches  [as]  a  gift  of  the  bountiful  gods. 


Lesson  3. 

Interrogative  Forms. 

1.  Learn  the  Forms  of  the  simpl-e  sentence  in  §  171 
a,  by  Cy  and  d,  with  the  Definitions  in  §§  179,  180,  and 
read  carefully  §  180.  a^  by  Cy  dy  and  e  (G.  Read  care- 
fully the  coarse  type  of  §§  192  and  474;  H.  Learn  the 
coarse  type  of  §§  347  and  350,  and  read  carefully  348, 
with  the  Notes). 

2.  Learn  the  meaning  of  the  following  Conjunc- 
tions :  — 

Both  . . .  and,  et . . .  et. 

Either  ...  or,  aut . .  .  aut. 

Whether  ...  or,  utrum  . . .  an. 

Neither  . . .  nor,  neque  {nee) . . .  neque  (nee). 

3.  Learn  the  meaning  and  use  of  the  Interrogative 
Particles,  and  the  forms  of  Questions  and  Answers  : 
§210,  with  ay  Cy  Cy  and  §  212  (G.  456,  457,  458,  also 
473,  3  and  2  ;  H.  351,  with  i,  2,  and  3  ;  and  352.  ^  Also, 
the  forms  of  Double  or  Alternative  Questions:  §  211 
(G.  460  and  461  ;  H.  353). 

a.  ater,  —  b.  Plural.  —  c.  Accusative.  —  d.  Tyrius. 


6  Latin  Composition. 

a.  Compare  the  two  forms  of  Questions  —  viz.,  of  simple  fact 
and  of  special  circumstance —  as  stated  in  §  210.  ^  and  e;  and  learn 
the  following  Interrogative  Words  :  — 

Who?   quis?         Where?  uhi?  Which  (of  two)  ?  uter? 

What?  quid?        When?   quando?      How?   quomodo? 
Why?  cur?  Whither?  quo?         How  many?    quot? 

b.  Notice  that  an  exclamatory  sentence  in  Latin  is  precisely  the 
same  as  the  latter  form  of  Question  ;  while  in  English  it  is  generally 
distinguished  by  the  order  of  the  words  (§  210.  e,  r.). 

Examples. 

Were  you  the  friend  of  Marcus  ?    erdsne  Marcl  amicus  ? 
Were  you  not  the   friend   of   Marcus?     Yes.     nonne   eras 

Marcl  amicus  ?    eram* 
Were  you  the  friend  of  Marcus  (i.e.  you  were  not,  were  you?)  ?    No. 

num  eras  Marcl  amicus  ?  ,  non  cram. 
Were  you  the  friend  of  Marcus  or  of  Publius  ?  utrum  3Iarcl 

(better,  Marclue)  an  JPublil  amicus  eras  ?    [Notice  that, 

if  it  were  Marcl  aut  Publilf  it  would  mean  that  you  might  be 

the  friend  of  both,  or  of  neither.] 

Model  Sentences. 

1.  Marcus  is  the  son  of  Quintus. 

2.  Marcus  is  not"  the  son  of  Publius. 

3.  Is  Marcus  the  son  of  Quintus?    Yes.^ 

4.  Is  not  Marcus  the  son  of  Quintus?    Yes. 

5.  Marcus  is  not  the  son  of  Publius,  [is  he]  ?*'     No.^ 

6.  Who  is  the  son  of  Quintus?     Marcus. 

7.  Is  Marcus  or  Lucius  the  son  of  Quintus?'' 

8.  Both  Marcus  and  Lucius  are  sons  of  Quintus. 

9.  Either  Marcus  or  Lucius  is  a  son  of  Quintus. 

10.  Neither  Marcus  nor  Lucius  is  a  son  of  Publius. 

1 1 .  Which  is  the  son  of  Quintus,  Marcus  or  Lucius  ?    Both.* 

12.  Which  is  the  son  of  Publius?     Neither  {iieuter)^ 

a.  Put  non  immediately  before  the  word  which  it  negatives. —  b.  Use  the 
verb :  §  212  (G.  473.  3  and  2 ;  H.  352) .  —  c.  Use  num :  §  210.  c  (G.  458  ;  H.  351. 
N.  3).  —  ^.  Put  this  in  different  forms:  \  211.  d  (G.  460;  H.  351  and  353)-  — 
e,  nterque. — /  These  forms  should  be  repeated  until  both  words  and  meaning 
are  perfectly  familiar.  Other  simple  sentences  may  be  varied  in  like  manner, 
for  oral  or  blackboard  practice,  the  above  serving  as  a  model  for  the  several 
variations. 


Use  of  Relatives,  7 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   Why  do  you  fear  the  dangers  of  war? — 2.  We  see  both 

timeo'^         perlculuin  bellum  video^ 

with-the-eyes  and  the  mind.  —  3.  How  cold  the  water  is!  — 

oculus  animus  quajn  frlgidus  aqua 

4.   How-great  are  thy  kindnesses  towards  us  !  —  5.   When  were 

quantus  tuus     benejiciuin  erga       nos 

you  at  Rome  or  Athens?" — 6.    Never;  but  I  was  often  at 

Roma  Athenae  nunquam     sed  saepe 

Corinth."" — 7.   We  often  see  many  both  fools  and  blind. — 

Corinthus  nitiltus  stultus  caectcs 

3.  A  good  man  neither  harms  [his]  enemies,  nor  envies  [them], 

bonus      vir  noceo^  zm'micus  (dzt.)        invideo"^ 

'  Write  in  ILatin. 

1.  Do  you  see  a  narrow  road  in  the  forest?    Yes. 

2.  How  great  are  the  gifts  of  the  gods  ! 

3.  We  were  both  weary  and  frightened. 

4.  We  do  not  see  wholly  either  with  the  eyes  or  with  the 
mind  (use  neque  .  .  .  neque). 

5.  The  queen  has  two  slaves,  the  one^  tall,  the  other*  stout. 

6.  We  have  neither  riches  nor  glory. 

7.  Does  a  good  man  ever  envy  the  bad  ? 

8.  The  dangers  of  war  frighten  cowards,  but  not  strong  men. 

9.  How-many  fingers  have-you  on  the  right-hand  ?   how 
many  on  the  left  ? 

10.    Pompey  was  an  honest  man,  no  doubt,"  and  a  good  gen- 
eral ;  but  proud,  jealous,  sullen,  and-not  ^  a  true  friend. 


Lesson  4. 

Use   of  Relatives. 

Note.  —  The  construction  of  the  Personal,  Demonstrative,  and 
Possessive  Pronouns  is  determined  by  their  signification,  and  is 
the  same  as  that  of  nouns  and  adjectives :  see  §§  194-197,  with  the 
subsections  (G.  198  and  290-299;    H.  446-452),  and  compare  the 

a.  See  $§  36.  c ;  40.  a  (G.  412;  H.  425.  i.  and  ii.,  with  48.  4  and  51.  6). — 
h.  alter  (ace.) .  —  c.  guidem.  —  d.  ueque. 


8  Latin  Composition, 

special  uses  of  the  Demonstratives  in  §  102.  They  require,  therefore, 
no  separate  exercises  in  syntax.  The  Relative,  on  the  other  hand, 
is  used  to  introduce  a  subordinate  clause,  with  subject,  predicate, 
and  grammatical  construction  distinct  from  that  of  the  antecedent 
clause.  This  relation  is  expressed  in  the  Rule  for  the  agreement  of 
Relatives:  §  198  (G.  616;   H.  445). 

In  the  construction  of  Relative  Clauses  the  following 
uses  require  to  be  noticed  :  — 

1.  The  Rule  of  Gender :  §  199  (G.  616.  3,  ii. ;  H.  445.  4)  ; 

2.  Agreement  with  implied  Antecedent:  §  199.  ^(G.  id.;  H.445.  5); 

3.  Repetition  of  the  Antecedent:  §  200.  a  (G.  617 ;  H.  445.  8)  ; 

4.  Noun  only  in  Relative  Clause  :  \^.  b  ; 

5.  Omission  of  the  Antecedent:  id.  c  (G.  623  ;  H.  445.  6)  ; 

6.  Priority  of  Relative  Clause:  §  201.  c  (G.  622);  see  also 
§  201.  a,  b. 

a.  A  Relative  is  often  used  in  Latin  where  in  English  we  use  a 
Demonstrative  with  and  or  but.  Compare  §  201.  e  (G.  612,  with 
Rem.  i;  H.  453).     Thus  — 

And  since  these  thin^  are  so,  quae  cum  ita  sint. 
But  if  they  [shall]  hesitate,  qui  si  duhitabunU 

b.  Where  as  or  that  is  used  in  English  as  a  relative  word,  it 
must  be  rendered  in  Latin  by  the  relative  word  which  corresponds  to 
its  demonstrative  antecedent :  as. 

The  same  [person]  as  before,  Idem  qui  ante. 

Such  an  orator  as  we  know  Cicero  [to  have  been],  talis  orator 

qudlem  Ciceronem  novimus, 
I  came  to  the  same  place  that  you  directed,  eodem,  venl  quo 

^nanddstl. 
As  many  minds  as  men,  quot  hom^ines  tot  sententiae. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   The  soldier  you  praise  (§  201.  a)  does  not  keep  [his]  faith. 

miles  laudo'^  servo'^  Jides 

—  2.   The  day  is-at-hand  in-which"the  Roman  people  yearly 

dies  (u.)      Insto'^  populus  guotannis 

a.  Repeat  the  noun:  §  200.  a  (G.  617 ;  H.  445.  8). 


Use  of  Relatives.  9 

elects  [its]  magistrates."  —  3.  Brutes   do  not  move^  from  the 

creo'^  magistrdtus^  bestiaij.)  commoveo^     ex         is 

spot  in  which  they  are  born.  —  4.  The''  greater  the  army,  [so 

locus  ndtus  exercitus^ 

much]  the'  heavier  is  the  loss.  —  5.  A  sort  [of  people]  who 

gravis  eludes  (f).  gens 

like-to  tell-a-He.  —  6.    Here-is  [the  man]  I  spoke-to  yesterday. 

libenter  (adv.)  mentior^  ecce  adloquor^        herl 

Examples  from  Caesar. 

I.   Three  parts,  of  which  the  Belgse  inhabit  one,  the  Aqui- 

pars  incolo^    unus 

tani  another,  the   Celtae  a  third.  —  2.   There- were   in-all  two 

alius  tertius  omjiino     duo 

ways  by  which  they  could  go-out    [from]   home.  —  3.    It-was 

iter  possum        exeo  domus 

full  moon,  [on]  which  day  the  sea '^  tides  are  greatest. —  4.  He- 

plenus  luna  maritimus  aestus^ 

himself  pushes-on  to  them  [by]  the  same  way  that  the  enemy 

contendo^  iter  hostis  {-gXwx .) 

had  gone.  —  5.  They  send  ambassadors,  head  of  which  embassy 

eo  initto^         legdtus  princeps  legdtio 

was  Divico,  who  had  been  chief  of  the  Helvetii. 

dux 
Write  in  !Latin. 

1.  The  boys  you  were  praising  just  now  are  very  idle  and 
troublesome. 

2.  Those  are  good  citizens,  who  adorn  the  state  by  their 
warlike*  glory,  and  their  own  homes  by  their  virtues. 

3.  Whatever  I  have  of  riches,  I  give  all  to  you. 

4.  We  honor  Rome,  which-''  is  the  head  of  all  Italy. 

5.  There  was  war  between  the  Romans  and  Samnites,  both 
of- whom  ^  were  brave  and  warlike  people.* 

6.  Which  do  you  consider  the  greatest  general,  Caesar, 
Scipio,  or  Hannibal  ?  Which  the  better  orator,  Cicero  or 
Demosthenes  ? 

a.  The  small  figure  denotes  the  declension.  —  b.  Understand  "  themselves"  : 
reverse  the  clauses.  —  c.  Use  quo  ...eo:  \  io6.  c  (G.  400,  fourth  illustrative 
sentence;  H.  423).  —  d.  This  word  is  here  an  adjective.  —  e.  bellicus. — f.  See 
\^  199  (G.  616.  3.  ii. ;  H.  445.  4). — g.  Nominative.  —  h.  Plural. 


lO  Latin  Composition, 

Lesson   5. 

The   Passive   Voice. 

Besides  the  simpler  uses  of  the  Passive,  correspond- 
ing to  the  meanings  of  the  tenses  as  given  in  the  Gram- 
mar, the  following  require  especial  attention  :  — 

a.  In  the  tenses  of  co7npleted  action  in  the  Passive,  —  the  perfect, 
pluperfect,  and  future  perfect,  —  the  participle  (amatus,  &c.)  is 
treated  as  an  adjective,  agreeing  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
subject  of  the  verb  :  as. 

War  has  been  prepared,  bellunn  pardtum  est. 
The  Grauls  had  been  subdued,   Galll  domitl  eranU 
The  ships  were  sunk,  naves  depressae  sunt* 

b.  In  the  Passive  Construction,  the  object  of  the  action  becomes 
subject,  while  the  subject  (or  agent),  if  a  person,  or  treated  as  a 
person  (personified),  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  with  the  prepo- 
sition a  or  ab,  by  ;  if  not  a  person,  by  the  ablative  alone  :  as, 

Caesar  subdued  the  Gauls,   Caesar  Gallos  domuit. 

The  Gauls  were  subdued  by  Caesar,  Galll  a  Caesare  domitl 

sunt. 
Hunger  destroys  men,  fames  necat  homines. 
Men  are  destroyed  by  hunger,  homines  fame  necantur, 

c.  An  Intransitive  verb  may  be  used  impersonally,  in  the  third 
person  singular  of  the  Passive  :  as, 

There  was  fighting  (lit.  it  [a  battle]  was  fought) ,  pugndtum 
est. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  This  city  of-ours  will  be  attacked  by  the  Gauls.  —  2.  Great 

oppugno  1 

seas  were  sailed-over  by  the   Carthaginians.  —  3.    Caesar  was 

navigo  ^  Ca  rthagin  i ens  is 

slain  by  conspirators.  —  4.  The  poor  lamb  will  be  mangled  by  a 

occldo^  conjurdtus  miser    dgnus  lacero^ 

wolf. —  5.  A  vast  monster  was  overcome  by  a  maiden.  —  6.  Ye 

lupus  ingens  monstrum  domo^  virgo 


The  Passive  Voice,  ii 


have  been  called  the  unhappiest  of  all  women.  —  7.  In  those 

appello^  miser  niulier  ilh 

places   there-is-no-living  outside   the  walls.  —  8.   The   will  of 

habito  ^       extra  (dat.) 

that  man  is  always  heeded. 

obtempero  ^ 

£xaiuples  from  Caesar. 

I.  When  the  Helvetii  were  informed  of  Csesar's  approach, 

certiorem  facio"^      de  adventus^ 

they  sent  ambassadors  to  him.  —  2.  Lucius  Cassius  the  consul 
had  been  slain,  and  his  army  beaten  and  sent  under  the  yoke. 

occido^  pello^ 

—  3.    Lucius  Piso  had  been  killed   [in]   the  same  battle    as 
Cassius.  —  4.  So  they  fought"  long  and  fiercely  [in]  doubtful 

ita  diu  acriter  anceps 

battles.  —  5.  When  they  had  fought  "long,  our  [men]  gained 

ctim.  (subjunctive)  potior'^ 

the  baggage  and  camp.  —  6.  There-was-terror  throughout  the 

impedimenta  (n.  plur.  abl.)  trepido"^ 

camp.* —  7.    Lists  were  found  in  the  camp  of  the  Helvetii,  and 

tabula  reperio^ 

brought  to  Caesar,  in  which  lists  an  estimate  had  been  made-out 

refero  (irr.)  ratio  cdtificio^ 

by-name.  —  8.   Of  those  who  returned  home,  the  number  was 

nominhtim  redeo  (ace.)  num.  ems 

found  [to  be]  110,000. 

(gen.) 

Write  in  X<atin. 

1.  The  faithful  guards  were  praised  by  all  the  citizens. 

2.  The  nightingale  is  charmed  by  her  own  songs. 

3.  Wreaths  had  been  given  to  the  victorious  soldiers. 

4.  Let  the  mountain  be  held  by  our  [men] . 

5.  A-battle-will-be-fought  to-morrow. 

6.  Between  the  wolf  and  dog  was  a  long''  dispute.** 

7.  Are  you  alarmed,  Romans,  at ^  the  dangers  of  war?     , 

8.  There-was-terror  throughout^  the  city. 

a.  Use  the  passive  impersonal  form  (it  was  fought).  —  b.   toils  castrls, — 
r.   dlu.  —  d.   Verb:  impers.  pass.  —  e.   Ablative. — f.   totus  {?^\^. 


12  Latin  Composition, 

Lesson  6. 

Infinitive  and  Subject-Accusatire. 

1.  The  following  are  the  uses  of  the  Infinitive :  — 

a.  The  Infinitive  {complementary)  is  used  where  the  sense  would 
be  incomplete  without  another  action  of  the  saine  subject :  as, 

I  cannot  change  [my]  plans,  consilia  non  possum  mutare. 

Such  verbs  are  to  be  able,  dare,  begin,  cease,  wish,  and  the  like. 

b.  The  Infinitive  is  used  like  the  no7ninative  of  a  neuter  noun,  in 
such  sentences  as  — 

To  write  (writing)  is  useful,  scrlbere  est  utile* 

c.  It  is  used  like  the  accusative  of  a  neuter  noun,  in  such  sen- 
tences as  — 

The  enemy  prepare  to  storm  the  town,  hastes  par  ant  ex- 
pugndre  oppidum. 

d.  In  either  of  these  uses,  it  may  take  as  subject  the  accusative 
of  a  noun  or  pronoun  :  as, 

For  an  old  man  to  dance  is  unbecoming,  senem  saltdre 

indecorum  est. 
I  see  that  you  are  lame,  video  te  esse  claudum., 

2.  The  Infinitive  with  Subject-Accusative  is  used 
with  verbs  and  other  expressions  of  Knowing,  Think- 
ing, Telling,  and  Perceiving :  as, 

He  says  [that]  the  hill  is  held  by  the  enemy,  dlcit  montem 

ah  hostibus  tenerl. 
There  was  a  report   that   Catiline   had   armed  the  slaves^ 

rumof^  erat  Catillnam  servos  armdsse. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   It  is  disgraceful  to  show  [your]  back  to  the  enemy  [in] 

tjirpis  do^  tergtt^n  (pi.)  (plur.) 

flight.  —  2.    No-man  can  be  happy  without  virtue.  —  3.    The 

nemo  beatus 


Infinitive  and  Subject- Accusative.  13 

burden  should  be-fitted  to  the  strength.  —  4.   It  is  the  greatest 

onus         debeo^  apto^  vis  (pi.)  summus 

folly  to  persist  in    [one's]    faults.  —  5.   The  neighbors  falsely 

deme7itia  {gen.) persevero^  vitium  v'lcmus  /also 

suppose  that  I  am  rich.  —  6.  They-say  [that]  the  enemy  have 

exlstimo  ^  dives 

advanced.  —  7.    Word-is-brought    [that]    the    Germans    have 

advejito  ^  nuntio  ^  Gerrnanus 

crossed  the  Rhine. 

iranseo*^  Rhemcs 

lExamples  from  Caesar. 

I.  He  says  [that]  it  is  very-easy  to  win  the -whole -of  Gaul. — 

Perfacilts         potior'^  totus  (gen.) 

2.   The  Helvetii  attempt  to  do  that  which  they  had-resolved.  — 

Conor  1  constituo  ^ 

-  3.    It-was-reported  to   Caesar,    [that]   they  were-attempting  to 

nuntio  ^  is 

make  [their]  way  through  our  province.' — 4.   He  says"  he  can- 

iter  provincia 

not,"  by  the  custom  and  example  of  the  Roman  people,  give  to 

7)ids  exempluvi 

any*  the  right-of-way  through  the  province.  —  5.   They  now 

iter  jam 

'^^ought  themselves  ""  ready  for  this  thing.  —  6.  The  Helvetii  [he 

paraUis  is         res 

.ays],  will  go  ^  to  that  quarter  and  will-remain  there,  where  Caesar 

pars  sum  ibi  ubi 

has  appointed.*' 

constituo  3 

Write  in  Liatin. 


I 


1.  It  is  a  grand -^  thing  to  be  made  consul  (ace). 

2.  It  is  beneficial^  for  a  sick'^  man  to  sleep. 

3.  It  is-better'  to  live  honorably-^"  than  to  be  born  honorably. 

4.  There  was,  however,  a  rumor  that  the  election  *  would 
be'put  off.^ 

5.  It  is  lawful  for  no  man  (ace.)  to  lead  an  army  against 
[his]  country. 

a.  Use  nego :  \  209.  b  (G.  446). —  b.  Use  either  Tdhts  or  quisquam, — • 
c.  Insert  <?jj^.  —  d.  Use  fut.  part.,  omitting  esse.  —  e.  Pluperf.  (or  perf.)  subj. — 
f.  magnificus. — g.  litilis. — h.  aegrotus.  —  I.  praestat. — j.  honeste.  —  k.  comitia 
(plur.).  —  /.  fore  ut,  —  vi.  differ 0  (imp.  subj.). 


14  Latin  Composition, 

6.  The    scouts "   report   that   the   Germans   have   already 
crossed^  the  Rhine. 

7.  I  hear  that  Cicero  has  set  out''  for- Athens  (ace). 

8.  Divitiacus  said  that  he  knew  these  things  were  true. 

9.  I  remember  that  [when]  a  boy  I  saw  the  orator  Hor- 
tensius. 

10.    I  take  it  ill*^  that  I  am  poor. 

Lesson   7. 

Participies:  Ablative  Absolute. 

The  following  are  special  uses  of  the  Participle  :  — 

a.  The  Participle  is  often  used  to  describe  some  circumstance  :  as, 
The  envoys  saluted  Lucius  Quinctius  while  ploughing  (at  the 

plough),  arantem  L.  Quinctium  legdtl  salutaverunt, 

b.  A  Noun  and  Participle  are  used  together  in  the  ablative  to  de- 
fine the  time  or  circumstances  of  an  action  {ablative  absolute)  :  as. 

If  but  few  stand  by  me,  I  will  not  despair,  panels  a  fne 

stantibus  9  non  desperaho. 
When  the  enemy  were  put  to  flight,  Caesar  called  back  his 

men,  hostibus  fugdtls,  Caesar  suds  revocdvit* 

Note.  —  The  Ablative  Absolute  is  very  rarely  found  except  with 
the  present  active  and  the  perfect  passive  participle. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   After  the-expulsion-of  the  kings,  consuls  were  created. 

posi  expello^  ic^^x^.)  creo^ 

' —  2.  Caesar  followed-up  the  Gauls  [and]  slaughtered  [them] 

adsequor^  (part.)  trucido^ 

while-in-flight.  —  3.   I  will  not  send  your  son  to-Rome  without- 

fugio"^  witto'^  (ace.) 

your-consent.  —  4.    Pythagoras    came  into    Italy  [while]   Tar- 

tu-iiivitus  "venio  * 

quinius  Superbus  [was]  king.  —  5.    Lysias,  when  [his]  son  was 
a.  explorator,  —  b.  transeo.  —  c.  projiciscor?  —  d.  aegre  fero. 


Participles :  Ablative  Absolute.  15 

banished  from  the  state,  lived  many  years  at-Sardis.  —  6.    Cati- 

Pello'^  e  annus  (ace.)    (abl.pl.) 

line  by  the-murder-of  [his]  son  made  his  house  empty  for  a 

neco  ^  dotnus      vacuus 

guilty  marriage. 

scelestzis    nuptiae 

Examples  from  Caesar. 

I.  Having-attacked  them  while  encumbered  and  off-their-guard, 

adgredior^  impedio^  inopinans 

he-cut-down  a  great  part  of  them.  —  2.  When  this  battle  was 

concido"^  proeliuin 

over,  he  provided  [for]  making  a  bridge  over  the  Arar.  —  3.  The 

/acio^  curo^  (ger.)  pons  (m.)     zjt  (abl.) 

men,    having   sent   [their]    javelins,    easily   broke-through   the 

miles  (pass.)  p'llum  facile  perfritigo'^ 

enemy's  phalanx.  —  4.  When  this  was  scattered,  drawing  [their] 

(plur.)        phalang-  (f.)  is  disjicio^  destringo^  (pass.) 

swords,  they  made  an  attack  upon  them.  —  5.  When  the  hill 

gladius  impetus        in  -  tttons 

was  taken,  [and]   as  our  [men]  were  coming  up,  the  enemy 

capio  ^  succedo  ^ 

attempted   to   out-flank   our   men   on   the    march   [on   their] 

aggredior^  circumvenio^  ex  iter 

exposed  flank.  —  6.   [In]  all  this  fight,  not-a-man  could  see  an 

aperttis     latus^  proelium        nem.o 

enemy  with-his-back-turned. 

averto  ^ 

Write  in  ILatin. 

1.  After  ending"  the  war  with  the  Veneti,  Caesar  put^  all  the 
senate  to  death  ^  [and]  sold  the  rest  [of  the  inhabitants]  at- 
public-sale.'' 

2.  We  strive'*  in  vain  when  nature  opposes.* 

3.  The  father,  despairing-of-^  the  arrival  of  his  son,  set-out^ 
for-Rome  (ace). 

4.  The  Latins,  having  lost'^  [their]  army,  begged  peace  of 
(^)  the  Romans. 

5.  The  Romans,  when  the  city  was  taken  by  the  Gauls, 
retreated'  to  the  Capitol. 

a.  r5^//f^/<9  3  (abl.  abs.).  —  b.  «^^<?T^  (abl.abs.).  —  c.  sub  corona.  —  d.  contendo.^ 
—  e.  repugno.^  — /  despero^  — g.  proficiscor?  —  h.  amitto?  —  i.  se  recipere? 


1 6  ^  Latin  Composition, 

II.  —  Constructions  of  Cases. 
1  •  —  Object'  Cases. 

Note.—  Observe  that  all  the  four  Oblique  Cases  (§  31.  g)  may 
be  used  in  Latin  as  Object-Cases,  with  different  classes  of  verbs, 
being  represented  alike  in  English  by  the  objective  case.     Thus  — 

1.  I  see  the  man,  hominem  video  (Accusative); 

2.  I  serve  the  man,  hominl  servio  (Dative); 

3.  I  pity  the  man,  hominis  misereor  (Genitive); 

4.  I  treat  the  man  as  a  friend,  homine  familidriter  utor 

(Ablative). 

Lesson  8. 

Direct  Object:    Accusatiye. 

Subordinate  to  the  use  of  the  Accusative  as  Direct 
Object  {Lesson  2),  are  the  following  :  — 

a.  Its  use  with  verbs  of  Feeling :  §  237.  b  (G.  329.  r.^  ;   H.  371, 

3.1)); 

b.  With  verbs  of  Sensation  (taste  and  smell)  :  id.  c  (G.  id. ; 
H.id.2)); 

c.  After  compounds  (chiefly  with  circum  and  trans)  :  id.  ^  (G. 
330;  H.  372); 

d.  After  Impersonal  verbs  (decet,  &c.)  :  id.  e  (G.  345.  r.^). 

e.  The  Cognate  Accusative  (so  called)  with  verbs  of  kindred 
meaning:  §  238  (G.  331  ;  H.  371.  ii.). 

f.  As  Secondary  Object  — 

1.  With  verbs  of  Naming,  &c. :  §  239.  a  (G.  334 ;   H.  373)  ; 

2.  With  Compounds :  id.  b  (G.  330.  R.^ ;   H.  376)  ; 

3.  With  verbs  of  Asking  and  Teaching:    id.  c  (G.  ^iZZ  5 

H.  374) ; 

4.  With  celo  and  lateo:  id.  d. 

Oral  Exercises.  « 

I.    Little-by-little  the  Germans  were-accustomed  to  cross  the 

^auldti'm  consuesco^  (plup.)  transeo 

Rhine.  —  2.   Three  divisions  of  [their]  forces  the  Helvetii  had 

Rhenus  ^ars  cdpiae 

a.  In  these  exercises  the  examples  are,  where  convenient,  but  not  uniformly, 
taken  from  Caesar. 


Uses  of  the  Accusative.  17 

now  led-across  the  Rhine.  —  3.  Hereafter  we  shall  live  a  safer 

jam.        traduco^  posthdc  vivo^        tutus 

life.  —  4.   We  have  laughed  enough  [at]  your  jokes,"  full  of 

r'ldeo'^  satis  joctis    plenus 

fun. —  5.    Every-man  grieves-at  his-own  miseries.  —  6.    I  will 

facetiae  quisqiie  doleo"^  iniseria 

teach  you  your  fate.  —  7.  We  beseech  peace  [of]  all  the  gods 

doceo'^  fatuin  {^\.)  dro^ 

and  goddesses.  — 8.  I  will  conceal  the  way  [from]  all.  —  9.  Some 

ce/o  ^  iter  nonnullus 

teach  children  only  [what  is]  useful,  [but]  overlook  [what  is] 

puer         solum  utilis  (pi.)  neglego^ 

honorable.  — 10.   The  consul  was  first  asked  [his]  opinion. — 

honestus  rogo  ^  sententia 

1 1 .  The  people  elect  [as]  consuls  Brutus   and  Collatinus.  — 

creo'^ 

12.  The  Gauls  begged  peace  of^  Csesar. 

peto  3 

"Write  in  ll.atin.^ 

1.  Caesar  led  his  forces  across  the  Rhine. 

2.  They  afterwards  hved  a  safer  life. 

3.  My  son  complains''  [of]  his  fortune. 

4.  We  shall  go  once  [on]  the  last  journey. 

5.  All  men  laugh-at  folly  :  all  men  grieve-at  misery. 

6.  These  cakes  have-a-taste-of  cinnamon. 
•7.  This  thing  is  hid  from  most.*^ 

8.  Do  you  only  beg*  pardon  of  the  gods. 

9.  I  did  not  hide  from  you  [my]  friend's  opinion. 

10.  Why  do  you  ask  me  that?     Ask  your  father. 

11.  The  consul  Nero •'' skilfully  concealed  his  march  [from] 
Hannibal. 

12.  The  senate  saluted  Cicero  [as]  father  of  [his]  country. 

13.  Lucius  Junius  Brutus  was  called  the  liberator^  of  Rome. 

14.  The  people  elected  Lucius  Junius  Brutus  and  Lucius 
Tarquinius  Collatinus  [as]  first  consuls. 

15.  An  old  herdsman  in  vain  begged^  [his]  liberty  [of] 
Vespasian. 

a.  §  79.  b  (G.  78:  H.  141.  — <5.  §  239.  c,  Rem.  (G.  333.  R.2;  H.  374.  N.  3).— 
c.  queror.  —  d.  plerique.  —  e.  posco?  — /.  Put  the  name  before  the  title.  — 
g.  \  185  (G.  197;  H.  373.  2). 


1 8  Latin  Composition, 

Lesson  9. 

Datiye  of  Indirect  Object, 

The  uses  of  the  Dative  are  the  following :  — 

a.  As  Secondary  Object,  with  transitives :    §  225,  with  ^,  d,  e 

(G.  344;  H.  384.  ii.); 

b.  As  Indirect  Object,  with  intransitives :  §  226  (H.  384.  i.). 

c.  With  verbs  of  special  signification:  §  227  (G.  345  ;  H.  385)  ; 

d.  With  Compounds :  §§  228,  229  (G.  346,  with  last  illustration; 
H.  386,  with  2). 

Note.  —  For  passive  use,  see  §  230  (G.  208;  H.  301.  i). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.    People  beheve    [their]   eyes  more  than  [their]  ears. — 

homo  credo^  amplhis  quam.  auris 

2.  Some-people  prefer  the  slightest  gratification  to  the  weightiest 

nonnulli         antepono^  levis  delectatio  gravis 

advantage.  —  3.   The  immortal  gods  will  pardon  you  [for]  this 

utilitas  iminortalis  Ignosco"^ 

fault.  —  4.   The  slaves  cursed  their  masters.  —  5.   Men  sound 

delictum  tnaledico^  dominus  unties    integer 

and  fresh  reheve  the  weary.  —  6.  Protect  our  innocence,  [O] 

recens  succurro^  fessus  subvenio^ 

judges.  —  7.  A  mother  will  always  be  obeyed  by  {a)  a  good  son. 

judex  pdreo  ^ 

—  8.  The  temples  of  the  gods  must-be-spared**  by  the  victorious 

parco  3  victor 

soldiery  (dat.).  —  9.   Both  consuls  had  indulged  that  legion. — 

miles  uterque    (sing.) 

10.   I  could  never  be  persuaded  that  souls  are  mortal.^ 

nunquam  persuadeo  ^  animus 

TVrite  in  Liatin. 

1.  The  ant  gets  itself  food  in  summer-time. 

2.  The  sun  shall  give  thee  signs. 

3.  You  pardon  yourself;  others  you  pardon  not. 

4.  Patience  heals "  any  ^  pain. 

5.  He  told  me  every  thing. 

a.  Use  the  participle  in  dies,  with  est.  —  b.  Accusative  and  Infinitive. — 
c,   medeor.  —  d.  ^ulvts. 


Genitive  and  Ablative,  19 

6.  I  mercifully  spared  the  wretched  man. 

7.  A  faithful  soldier  serves  the  state. 

8.  The  soldiers  spared ""  the  temples  of  the  gods. 

9.  Our  men  pressed-hard*  the  flying  Gauls. 

{Passive?) 

10.  Your  glory  is  envied. 

11.  Liars  are  not  beheved.^ 

12.  The  temples  of  the  gods  were  spared. 

13.  That  age  is  not  envied,  but  even  favored. 

14.  The  authority  of  the  senate  will  be  obeyed. 

15.  Clodius  was  distrusted  by  all  good  citizens. 

Lesson    10. 

Genitiye  and  Ablative. 

The  Genitive  and  Ablative  are  used  as  object-cases 
with  only  a  few  verbs,  of  the  classes  designated  as 
follows  :  — 

a.  The  Genitive  is  the  object  of — 

1.  Verbs  of  Memory:    §   219   (G.   375;    H.   406.   ii.   and 

409.  i.)  ; 

2.  Verbs  of  Accusing,  &c.  (of  charge  or  penalty)  :  §  220 

(G.  377;  H.  409.  ii.); 

3.  Verbs  of  Pity:  §  221.  ^  (G.  y]6\  H.  406.  i.)  ; 

4.  Thelmpersonalsmiseret,  etc.:  id.  ^(G.  id. ;  H.  409.  iii.); 

5.  The   Impersonals   refert   and  interest:    §   222  and  a 

(G.  381.  2 ;  H.  408.  I  and  2)  ; 

6.  Verbs  of  Plenty  and  Want  (rarely)  :  §  223  (G.  389.  r.^  ; 

H.  410.  v.  i). 

b.  The  Ablative  is  the  object  of  the  Deponents  utor,  fruor, 
fungor,  potior,  and  vescor,  with  several  of  their  compounds : 
§  249  (G.  405;  H.  421.  i.). 

N.  B.  With  these  verbs  the  Ablative  is  strictly  an  ablative  of 
means  or  source^  rather  than  a  direct  object  of  the  verb. 

Remark.  —  Notice  the  special  use  of  the  Genitive  with  potior: 
§  249.  a  (G.  405.  R.3;  H.  410.  v.  3). 

a.  temper  0.  —  b.  ins  to.  —  c.  credo. 


20  Latin  Composition, 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   An  old-man  remembers   [his]    old  griefs.  —  2.    Catiline 

senex  ■memini  vetus    dolor  Catillna 

admonished  one  of  his  poverty,  [and]   another  of  his  ambition. 

admoneo"^  egestas  cup'ido 

—  3.    Every-man   regrets    his  own  fortune.  —  4.    This   boy  is 

qiiisque  paenitet 

neither  ashamed  nor  tired  of  his. sloth.  —  5.    I  am  weary  of 

pudet  taedet  ignavia  taedet 

these  daily  vexations.  —  6.   Verres  is  charged  with  extortion. 

guotldianus   molestia  arg7io^  repetundae 

—  7.    All    the    conspirators    were    capitally'*   condemned. — 

conj'urdtus  datntio^ 

8.    Remember   (said  he)    the  ancient   valor   of  the    Helvetii. 

reminiscor^  inquatn  pristinus      virtus 

—  9.    The  Romans  got-hold-of  the  baggage  and  the  camp  of 

potior'^  ifnpedlmetitum  (pi.) 

Ariovistus.  — 10.    At-length  the  eyes  do  not  fulfil  their  office. 

aliquajido  fungor  tnunus 

—  II.    Pity   a   frail   perishing   race. —  12.    We   enjoy   all   the 

tnisereor^  fragilis      caducus         gens.  /ruor^ 

advantages  of  life  together  with  [our]  friends. —  13.    I  feed  on 

commodum  una  vescor^ 

milk,  cheese,  [and]  meat,  writes  the  Scythian  Anacharsis.^ 

lac         cdseus  caro  Scythes 

TVrite  in   L.atin. 

1.  Cato  admonished  the  judges  of  the  laws  and  of  [their] 
oath.'' 

2.  We  have-no-need  **  of  your  help. 

3.  The  man  is  neither  ashamed  nor  sorry  for  his  cowardice. 

4.  The  Athenians  charged  Socrates  with  impiety, 

5.  Forget  slaughter  and  conflagration. 

6.  I  lack  not  gold  or  silver. 

7.  You  have   charged  me  in-my- absence  *  with  a  capital 
offence/ 

8.  Brutus  condemned  to  death  "  his  two  sons. 

9.  The  Macedonian-^  phalanx  employed*  very-long*  spears. 

a.  See  \  220.  a  (G.  337.  R.i ;  H.  410.  iii.  Note  2).  —  b.  Put  the  name  first. — 
c.  religio,  —  d.  nihil  hidigere, —  e.  absens. — /  res  capitalis. — g.  Macedonlcus. 

—  h,  Utor,  —  i.  praelongus. 


Ge7titive  with  Adjectives,  21 

10.  A  brave  man  bravely  performs  his  duty. 

11.  A  base  man  takes-advantage-of*  the  ignorance  or  folly 
of- others. 

12.  We  enjoy  the  gifts  of  the  earth,  which  therefore  we  call 
fruits  and  crops. 

13.  The  soldiers  of-the-legion  *  used  a  shield,  a  javelin,  and 
a  short  sword. 

2,  —  With  Adjectives. 

Lesson   1 1 . 

Genitive  with  Adjectires. 

Adjectives  which  take  the  Genitive  are  the  follow- 
ing :  — 

a.  Adjectives  of  Desire,  Memory,  &c. :   §  218.  a  (G.  yj2i\  H. 
399-  i-  I'  2)  ; 

b.  Verbals  in  ax  and  Participles  in  ns  :  id.  b  (G.  374 ;  H.  id.  ii.)  ; 

c.  Adjectives  of  Quality,  &c. :  id.  c  (G.  id.  R.^ ;  H.  id.  iii.)  ; 

d.  Adjectives  used  as  Nouns  :  id.  d  (G.  356.  R.* ;  H.  391.  ii.  4). 

Note.  —  Compare  §  218.  d  with  the  Remark  under  §  188. 
Oral  Exercises. 

I.   The   Gauls   are   barbarous,   and    unacquainted-with   our 

barbarus  irjtperltus 

customs.  —  2.    The  mind  of  man  is  ignorant  of  fate  and  of 

cdnsnetudo  (sing,)  -utens  (plur.)  nescius  fatutn 

coming   destiny.  —  3.    I  have    sent    men  well-acquainted-with 

/iiturus  sors  peritus  (superl.) 

those  regions.  —  4.  You  have  a  leader  mindful  of  you,""  forgetful 

regio  dux  memor  obliius 

of  himself.  —  5 .   The   man  had  ^  a  mind  fierce   and   uncon- 

ferox  itn- 

trollable  in  wrath.  —  6.    [His]  body  was  capable-of-enduring 

potens  Ira  patiens 

a.  abutor,  —  b.  legionaritis.  —  c.  See  \  194.  b  (G.  362). —  d.    Use  ^jj^  with 

dative. 


\ 


22  Latin  Composition. 

abstinence,  watching,  [and]  cold.  —  7.   Our  life  is  full  of  snares 

hiedia  vigilia  algor  Insidiae 

and  fear.  —  8.    No  age  was  more-fruitful-in  virtue. 

tnetus^  aetas  /erax 

Write  in  Latin. 

1.  This  man  is  eager"  for  glory  and  greedy*  of  praise. 

2.  Most  boys  are  careless.''  about  antiquities. 

3.  Gaul  is  full  of  Roman  citizens. 

4.  Night  alone  was  conscious  of  this  deed.** 

5.  This  boy  is  very  like^  his  father. 

6.  The  consul  was  full  of  plans,  [but]  sparing-''  in  words. 

7.  The  river  Rhine  is  common^  to  Gaul  and  Germany. 

8.  Achilles,  bravest  of  the  Greeks,  was  ungovernable^  in 
wrath. 

Lesson    12. 

Dative  with  Adjectives, 

The  Dative  is  used  after  Adjectives,  to  denote  that 
to  which  the  given  quality  is  directed,  or  for  which  it 
exists.     Under  this  use  are  included  :  — 

a.  The  dative  of  Fitness,  Nearness,  &c. ; 

b.  Of  Likeness  and  Unlikeness  ; 

c.  Of  Service  and  Inclination:  §  234.  a  (G.  356;  H.  391.  i). 

Remark.  —  Observe  the  use  of  the  prepositions  ad  to  denote  the 
End:  §  234.  b  (G.  356.  R.^;  H.  391.  ii.  i),  (2))  ;  and  in  or  erga 
with  words  of  Inclination:  id.  6*  (G.  id.  R.'-^;  H.  id.  (i)). 

Also,  notice  the  use  of  similis  with  the  Genitive  :  id.  d.  Rem.  (G. 
id.R.';  H.  id.  4)). 

Oral  Exercises? 

I.  Another's  virtue  is  always  alarming  to  tyrants.  —  2.  A  king 

alienus  formidulosus       tyrannus 

is  always  exposed  to  faithless  counsels.  —  3.  To  each-one  of  the 

obtioxius  nifldus       consiluint  utiusqjtisque 

virtues  some  vice  is  next-neighbor. —  4.  The-rest-of  the  sons 

aliqiiis  flnitirmis  c'eterus 

a.  cupidus.  —  b.  avidus. — c.  negleg'ens. —  d. /acinus.  —  e.  ^  218.  d  (G.  356. 
R.i ;  H.  391.  ii.  4) ),  — /.  parous.  — g.  imfotens. 


Ablative  with  Adjectives,  23 

were  survivors  of  [their]  father.  —  5.  That  grief  was  common 

stipe  r si  es  dolor  communis 

to  the  three  brothers.  —  6.  Fathers  are  sometimes  unjust  to  their- 

ndfinunqtiam   inlqinis 

own  sons. —  7.    Children  are  generally  like  [their]  parents. — 

liber'i  (plur.)  plerntnqiie  parens 

8.   When  these  things  were  settled,  having-found  a  time  fit  for 

constttuo^         nanciscor"^  tdonetis  ad 

sailing,  he  set-sail  about  the  third  watch  (abl.).  —  9.    He  was 

tuivigo^  soh'o'^        fere  vigilia 

friendly  to  the  Helvetii,  because  he  had  taken  in  marriage  the 

amicus  guod  dicco^        matrimoniunt 

daughter  of  Orgetorix. 

Write  in  !Latin. 

1.  Death  is  like  a  sleep. 

2.  To  a  frail  ship  all  winds  are  contrary. 

3.  The  death  of  Socrates  was  in-harmony  "  with  his  life. 

4.  I  have  noticed  a  harbor  fit  ^  for  our  ships. 

5.  Livius  was  of-the-same-age  "^  with  Ennius. 

6.  Not  even  the  gods  —  so  they  boast  —  are  a-match-for  ** 
the  Swabians.* 

7.  Radishes-''  are  bad^  for  the  teeth,  says  Pliny .'^ 

8.  This  thing  is  easy  for  me,  [but]  hard  for  you. 

9.  Simple  food  is  good'  for  children.-^* 

10.   The  speech  of  Marius  was  very  pleasing  to  the  people. 

Lesson   13. 

Ablative  with  Adjectives. 

The  uses  of  the  Ablative  with  Adjectives  are  the  fol- 
lov^ing :  — 

a.  Of  Freedom  and  Want  (also  opus  and  iisus)  :   §  243.  d,  e 
(G.  388^  2>17>-  R-".  390;  H.  414-  iii-  iv.)  ; 

b.  Of  Source  (the  participles  natus,  etc.)  :   §  244.  d  (G.  395  ; 
H.415.  ii.); 

c.  Comparatives:  §  247,  with  a  (G.  399;  H.  417,  with  i)  ; 

a.  consentdneus.  —  b.  idoneus. — c.  aequalls. — d.  par.  —  e.  Suevi. — f.  rapha>. 
nus. — ^.  inimicus.  —  h.  ait  Pl'mius. —  /.  utilis. — j.  puer. 


24  Latin  Composition. 

d.  Of  Abundance  (participles  and  verbals)  :  §  248.  c  (G.  389.  R.^ ; 
H.  421.  ii.). 

e.  Of  Worth:  §  245.  a  (G.  398.  R.^;  H.  421.  iii.). 

f.    To  denote  degree  of  difference :  §  250  (G.  400  ;  H.  423). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  A  city  bare  of  defence  requires  aid. —  2.  Even  a  wise-man 

nudus       praesidiujn  ,posco^       op-  etiam      sapiens  (dat.) 

has  need  of  friends.  —  3.   Tiberius  Gracchus,  born-of  a  most- 

opus 

noble  mother.  —  4.   An  honorable  death  is  preferable  to  a  base 

nobilis  honestus  potior  turpis 

life.  —  5.    Nothing  has  been  found  among  men  rarer  than  a 

( abl . )  invert  io  *  rd  rus 

perfect  orator.  —  6.  We  esteem  all  human  [things]  inferior  to 

duco  ^ 

virtue.  —  7.  He  waged  wars  more  bravely  than  successfully."' — 

(abl.)  gero^  fortiter  feliciter 

8.    It  is  a  space  of  not  more  ^  than  six  hundred  feet.  —  9.  The 

spatiicrn  ampiius  pes 

house  of  Verres  was  full  of  plundered  ornaments. —  10.  Good 

refertus  rapio^  orndmentum 

men  dread  a  life  full  and  crowded  with  delights.  —  11.    Ireland 

tnetuo^  confertus  vohiptds  Hibemia 

is  smaller  by  half,  as  is  reckoned,  than  Britain.  —  12.  Another 

parvus    dimidium  ut  aestimo  ^  alter 

way  through  the  province,  much  easier  and  more  expeditious. 

iter  facilis  expedltus 

Write  in  Liatin. 

1.  What  Roman  is  free  from  this  dishonor''? 

2.  The  army  was  in-lack'^  of  all  necessaries. 

3.  Cato,  said  his  friends,  was  clear  ^  of  every  human  fault. 

4.  I  have  need-''  of  your  help. 

5.  Thou   art   sprung^   not  from   human   blood,  but  from 
divine  stock. 

6.  Ignorance  of  future  evils  is  better  than  knowledge. 

7.  From*  the  tongue  of  the   aged  Nestor,  says'  Homer, 
flowed  speech  sweeter  than  honey. 

a.  See  §  192,  with  a  (G.  314;  H.  444.  2).  —  b.  See  \  247.  c  (G.  311.  R.^; 
H.417.  N.2.  —  c.  dedecus.  —  d.  eg'ens.  —  <?.  vacuus, — /.  opus. — g.  ortus.  —  h.  ex, 
—  i.  ait. 


Uses  of  the  Accusative.  25 

8.  These  things  are  harder  than-one-would-think." 

9.  In  the  battle  at-Cannae*  the  Romans   lost  more  than 
40,000  men. 

10.  The  speech  of  the  consul  was  more  true  than  pleasing 
to  the  people. 

1 1 .  He  judged  you  unworthy  of  every  honor. 

12.  We  suffer  no  more  from  foreign  enemies  than  [from] 
those-at-home.'^ 

13.  Corinth  was   the   richest   city   of  Greece   in   pictures, 
statues,  and  gold. 

14.  Cicero  was  six  years  older  than  Caesar. 

15.  The  more  cautiously  you  go,  the  sooner  "*  you  will  arrive. 

16.  Veii  was ^  about  twenty  miles  distant*  from  Rome. 

1 7.  The  battle  of  Cannae*  was  fought  seventeen  years  before-'' 
[that]  of  Zama.^ 

%.  — Miscellaneous  Uses. 

Lesson   14. 

Uses  of  the  Accusative. 

The  special  uses  of  the  Accusative  are  the  follow- 
ing:— 

a.  Adverbial:  §  240.  a,  b  (G.  331.  R.^ ;  H.  378,  with  2)  ; 

b.  Of  Specification :  id.  c  (G.  332,  with  R.^ ;  H.  378,  with  i)  ; 

c.  Of  Exclamation :  id.  d  (G.  340;  H.  381). 

Remark.  —  The  Accusative  of  Specification  is  rarely  used  except 

in  poetry,  or  in  poetic  description,  and  should  generally  be  avoided 

in  writing  Latin  prose    (compare   the  Ablative   of  Specification: 

Lesson  16). 

Oral    Exercises. 

I.   The  Swabians  live  for  the  greatest  part  on  milk  and  meat 

Stievi  lac  ;pecus 

[of  domestic  animals].  —  2.    I   [am]   extremely  glad  on  your 

magnopere  gaudeo  ^ 

a.  opinio.  —  b.  Cannensls. —  c.  domestlcus. —  d.  citius,  —  e.  abesse  a. — f.  In- 
sert quam.  —  g.  Zamensis. 


26  Latin  Composition. 

account.  —  3.    He  was  a  man  in  other  [respects]  excellent. — 

vicis  vir  cetcrus  egregiiis 

4.    When  he  was  at-that-time  of  life,  he  was  made  chief-com- 

cutn  (subj.)  aetas  im- 

mander.  —  5.    He  was  hit  in  the  right  knee  with  a  stone. — 

perdtor  ico^  dexter   genu  lapis 

6.    I  said  that  they  would-come  at  that  time.  —  7.    Alas,  the 

(fut.  part.)  tempiis  hen 

folly  of  men  !  —  8.    Oh  the  deceitful  hope  of  man,  and  [his] 

dementia  falldx  (plur.) 

frail  fortune,  and  our  vain  strifes  ! 

fragilis  iftdnis  contentio 

Write  in  !Latin. 

1.  I  am  often  sorry  on  your  account.* 

2.  At  that  time  Romulus  was  king. 

3.  A  man  at  that  age  ought  to  be  more  discreet*  than 
daring.'' 

4.  Hannibal  was  severely  wounded  right  in  the  thigh  ^  with 
a  dart.^ 

5.  The  commander  exhorted  his  [men]  at-length.-'' 

6.  The  maidens  put  on  long  robes.^ 

7.  Ah  !  ^  the  faith  of  gods  and  men  1 

8.  What  a  man  !  what  impudence  !  what  audacity  ! 

9.  Happy  the  Roman  chiefs  of-old.* 
10.   Ah  V  unhappy  me  ! 


Lesson    15. 

Datiye:  Idiamatic  Uses. 

Special  or  idiomatic  uses  of  the  Dative  are  the  fol- 
lowing :  — 

1.  Of  Possession:  §  231  (G.  349;  H.  387). 

2.  Of  Service  {^predicate  dative) :   §  233  (G.  350  ;   H.  390). 

a.  vicis.  —  b.  prudhis.  —  c.  audax  (comparative). —  d.  adversmn  femur. — 
e.  tragtila. — /  multa. — g.  ^  240.  c,  N.  (G.  332.  2;  H,  377).  —  h.  pro.  —  /'.  quon- 
datn. — j.  heu. 


Dative:   Idiomatic   Uses.  2/ 

3.  Of  Reference:  §  235  (G.  343),  including  the  Ethical  Dative: 
§236(0.351  ;  H.389)- 

Remark. —  After  the  Dative  used  with  expressions  of  Naming 
(as  nomen  est) ,  observe  that  the  name  is  more  commonly  in  the 
Dative  by  attraction ;  as  huic  puero  nomen  est  Marco  rather  than 
Marcus. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   To  the  boy  was  given   the   name  Egerius,    from    [his] 

indo"^  ab 

poverty. —  2.    In    this    person   was    a   manly   soul.  —  3.    The 

inopia  homo       iiisuni  virilis  ingeniuni 

friendship  of  the  Roman  people  ought  to  be  our  ornament  and 

(ace.)  oportet  orndineiiticm 

defence,  not  [our]  ruin.  —  4.    Avarice  is  a  great  harm  to  men. 

praesidhim  detrimenturn  avdritia  malum 

—  5.   When  this  thing  was  told,  Caesar  sent  all  the  cavalry  out 

(rel.)  fiuntio^  ,  equitdtus 

of  the  camp,  as  a  relief  to  his  [troops].  —  6.    A  fine  house  is 

castra  auxilinm  pulcher 

built  for  [its]  masters,  not  for  mice.  —  7.  Ortygia  is  situated  on 

aedi/ico^  domiutis  mus  situs 

the  right  side  as-you-enter "  the  great  harbor  of  Syracuse. — 

pars  zntro'^  partus  Syrdcusae 

8.  What  does  this  speech  mean?^ 

ordtio         vola 


"Write  in  Liatiu. 

1.  A  sick  man  always  has  hope. 

2.  The  surname  of  Lucius  Scipio  was  Asiaticus  ;  of  PubHus 
his  brother,  Africanus. 

3.  The  name  of  this  disease  is  avarice. 

4.  We  used  to  give  him  the  nickname  ^  of  sluggard. 

5.  This  book  was  of  great  service'^  to  me. 

6.  For  whose  (dat.)  advantage "  is  this  ? 

7.  The  Germans  came  to  our  relief.-'' 

8.  I  seek  for  myself  no  defence  against  danger^  or  helps  to 
honors.^ 

a.    See  ^S   235.   b  (G.  354).  —  b.    Insert   sibl.  —  c.    cogtibmen. —  d.   usus.-^ 
e.  bonum. — /  auxilium, — g.  Dative. 


28  Latin  Composition. 

9.   A  good  man  seeks  wealth  not  for  himself  only,  but  for 
his  children  and  friends. 

10.   Anticyra   is    situated  "^   on    the    left   as    you   enter   the 
Corinthian  gulf. 

Lesson   16. 

Uses  of  the  Ablatiye. 

Among  the  miscellaneous  uses  of  the  Ablative  may 
be  reckoned  the  following  :  — 

1.  Of  Cause,   Manner,   Means,   and    Instrument:    §§    245,   248 
(G.  401,  403,  406;  H.  416,  419.  iii.,  420)  ; 

2.  Of  Quality:   §  251  (G.  402;  H.  419.  ii.)  ; 

3.  Of  Price:  §  252  (G.  404;  H.  422),  comparing  the  Genitive 
of  Value:  §  252.  a  (G.  379,  380;  H.  405)  ; 

4.  Of  Specification :  §  253  (G.  398;  H.  424). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.    Some  [people]  by  [reason  of]  some  disease  and  dulness 

giiidani  aliqtns      morbus  stupor 

of  sense   do  not  perceive  the  sweetness  of  food.  —  2.  What 

sensus^  sentio^  suavi'tas  cibus 

is- done  through  good-will,  that  you  charge  [as]  done  through 

flo  benevolentia  crimznor^ 

hate.  —  3.    How  many  are  unworthy^  of  the  hght,  and  yet  the 

odium  indlgnus  lux  tamett 

day  arises  !  —  4.    Great  things  are  done,  not  by  strength  or 

orior^  (superl.)  gero^  vts  (pi.) 

Speed  of  body,  but  by  hardihood  of  soul.  —  5.    A  man  of  most 

celeritas        (plur.)  fortitudo  anhnus 

vigorous  genius  then  ruled  the  state.  —  6.  There  was  between 

acer         ingenium    turn       rego^ 

Labienus  and  the  enemy  a  str^m  of  difficult  passage,'^  [with] 

(plur.)  Jlumen  difficilis       transitus^ 

steep  banks. —  7.   The  Gauls  with  the  same  speed  pushed-on 

Praeruptus  r'lpa  contendo^ 

to  our  camp.  — -  8.    I  have  bought  this  estate  at  a  very-large 

vtercor'^  /ufidus 

a.  situs.  — k.  See  §  245.  a  (G.  398.  R.2;  H.  421.  hi.).  — <^.  Insert  "and." 


Uses  of  the  Ablative,  29 

price.  —  9.    My  conscience  is  [worth]  more  to  me  than  every- 

Peciinia  conscicntia 

body's  talk. —  10.    All  the  Gauls  differ  from  one  another"  in 

sermo  differo 

language,  customs,  [and]  laws. 

Imgtia         Institutuni  lex 

Write  in  !Latin. 

1.  For  the  sake  of  the  republic,  I  accuse  Lucius  Catiline. 

2.  The  Roman  people  held^  the  young  Scipio  worthy  *  of 
the  highest  honors. 

3.  I  judge  ""  him  most  unworthy  of  every  honor. 

4.  Ducks  delight  ^  chiefly  in  marshy  *  places. 

5.  Bulls  defend  themselves  with  [their]  horns,  boars  with 
[their]  tusks. 

6.  Great  things  are-done-^  not  by  strength  or  speed  of  body, 
but  by  counsel  and  valor. 

7.  Links  of-steel^  are  worn-out'^  by  constant  use. 

8.  The  barbarians  were  of  vast  size*  of  body  (plur.). 

9.  A  mountain  of  great  height  overhangs*^'  the  town. 

10.  Caesar  was  a  man  of  extraordinary  force*  of  intellect,^ 
and  of  remarkable  skill ""  in-war." 

11.  I  have  sold  my  house  for  fifteen  talents. 

12.  That  oration  cosf  him  a-great-deal-of  labor. 

13.  In  glory  Cicero  was  far  inferior  to  Caesar,^, but  superior 
in  eloquence  and  wisdom. 

14.  In  laws  and  language  the  Greeks  widely^  differ  from  the 
Romans,  but  in  warlike  "  glory  they  are  nearly  equal. 

15.  My  brother  is  lame  of  the  left ''  foot. 

16.  The  Spartans  excelled*  all  the  other  Greeks^  in  fidelity 
and  reverence  to  the  laws."* 

17.  The  Germans  were  a  race  of  tall''  stature,  fair  complex- 
ion, blue '"  eyes,  courage  in  war,"  and  great  strength  of  body. 

a.  inter  se:  \  196.  /  (G.  212;  H.  448.  n). —  b.  dignor)- —  c.  aestimo.^  — 
d.  delector^  —  e.  paluster. — f.  gero?  —  g.  ferreus. —  h.  contero.^ — i.  mag- 
iiitudo. — j.  unpen deor' — k.  vis. —  /.  ingenlum.  —  m.  scientm.  —  n.  re'i  bellicae. 

—  o.  stoy  —  /.   Ablative, —  q.  mtiltum. —  r.  laevus.  —  s.  a?itecello.  —  t.  Dative. 

—  u.  Genitive.  —  v.  grandis.  —  w.  caeruleus. 


30  Latin  Composition, 

Lesson  17, 

Time  and  Place. 

The  uses  especially  requiring  to  be  noted  are  the  fol- 
lowing :  — 

1.  The  Accusative  of  Duratiou  and  Extent:  §§  256,  257  (G.  337, 
335;  H.  379); 

2.  The  Ablative  of  Time  :  §  256  (G.  392  ;  H.  429)  ; 

3.  The  Genitive  of  Measure:   §  257.  a  (G.  364.  r.)  ; 

4.  The  relations  of  Place,  especially  the  Locative  forms  :  §  258. 
a,  b,  c,  d{G.  410,  411,  412,  with  r.^  ;  H.  380,  425.  i.  ii.,  412,  426 
1,2),  and  the  Locative  uses  of  the  Ablative :  §  258./  (G.  384-386; 
H.425.  3). 

5.  The  expression  of  Dates  :   §  259.  e  (G.  App.  ;  H.  642). 

Remark.  —  With  all  names  of  places,  at  meaning  7tear  (not  in) 
is  to  be  expressed  by  ad  or  apud  with  the  accusative. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   The  next  night  Caesar  moved  [his]  camp. —  2.  We  have- 

proxinius  vioveo'^ 

been-waiting"  [for]  you  all  summer.  —  3.    I  spend  whole  days 

tdius      aestas  sum  totns 

with  Marcus,  and  quite-often  a  part  of  the  night.  —  4.  We  have 

saepenumero 

besieged  this  city  ten  successive  summers.  —  5.    I  have  lived 

circumsedeo'^  contintiiis 

within  the  last  twenty  years  at  Rome,  Tarentum,  Athens,  Gabii, 

hie  proximns  annus 

Carthage,   [and]  Sardis.  —  6.    Numa  dwelt  at  Cures ;   but  he 

Carthago  Sardes  (pi.)  habito"^ 

afterwards   reigned   forty   years    in    Rome. —  7.    The    soldiers 

posted  regno  ^ 

made-a-halt  at  Alba,  a  fortified  town.^ — 8.  Cneius  Pompey  [when] 

conszsto^  mun'itus 

a  young-man  had  won  the  greatest  glory  at-home  and  in-the- 

adulescens  adsequor'^ 

service.  —  9.  That  day  was  the  26th  of  March.*^ —  10.    Marcus 

militia 

Regulus  was  sent  from  Carthage  to  Rome  [to  treat]  of  peace. 

di 

a.  Present:  \  296.  a  (G.  221;  H.  467.  iii.  2).  —  b.  Use  in:  \  184.  c  (G.  412. 
R.2 ;   H.  425.  3,  Note).  —  c.  See  §  376,  d  (G.  App,;   H.  642.  iii.  with  2,  3). 


Gerundive  Constructions,  31 

Write  in  L.atin. 

1.  In  winter  and  summer  the  Arabs  roam-over"  the  plains. 

2.  At  the  beginning  of  summer^  the  consul  passed''  into 
Spain. 

3.  Agamemnon  scarcely  in  ten  years  took  one  city. 

4.  Within  three  days  I  will  finish  "^  the  work. 

5.  Caesar  moves    [his]    camp,  and  in   about  fifteen  days 
arrives  at  the  bounds^  of  the  Belgae. 

6.  I  was  yesterday  at  Caesar's  house  {aptid  Caesa7r7?t). 

7.  That  most  illustrious-^  commander  had  strengthened^  the 
republic  at  home  and  abroad  by  his  victories. 

8.  Brutus   learned    philosophy   at    Athens,    eloquence    in 
Rhodes. 

9.  My  sisters  are  passing'^  their  life  in  the  country.* 

10.  I  have  lived  in  Rome,  Carthage,  Athens,  Naples,  and 
Corinth  ;  and  have  now  been-^'  three  years  at  home  in  Gaul. 

1 1 .  Amynander  sent  ambassadors  both  to  Rome  to  the  Sen- 
ate, and  to  the  Scipios  in  Asia.* 

12.  Cicero  after  [his]  exile  sailed^  from  Greece  to  Italy,  and 
remained  a  few  days  at  Brundisium  ;  then,  through  friendly 
cities,  returned  to  Rome. 

Lesson  i8. 

Gerundive  Constructions. 

In  the  use  of  Gerundive  Constructions,  the  following 
should  be  carefully  distinguished  :  — 

1.  The  Participial  or  Adjective  use  :  §  294  (G.  243  ;  H.  200.  iv.)  ; 

2.  The  Gerund,  with  Object-Accusative  :  §  295  (G.  427  ;  H.  541)  ; 

3.  The  Gerundive  in  Agreement,  having  the  force  of  the  Gerund  . 
§  296  (G.  428;  H.  543,  544); 

4.  The  special  uses  of  the  four  Object-Cases  :  §§  29S-301  (G.  429- 
434;  H.  542,  544). 

a.  feragro}-  —  b.  ineunte  aestate.  —  c.  transeo.  —  d.  pcrficio?  —  e.  fines.  — 
/  clarus. — g.  augeoP-  —  h.  agofi — /.  See  <J  258.  d  (G.  412.  R.l;  H.  426.  2). — 
J.  Present.  —  k.  Accusative.  —  l.ndvigo. 


32  Latift  Composition. 

Remark.  —  In  general,  the  gerundive  construction  in  Latin  cor- 
responds with  the  participial  noun  in  -ing.    The  chief  difference  is  — 

1.  That  for  the  nominative,  the  Infinitive  must  be  employed  in 
Latin:  as, 

Writing  is  useful,  scrlhere  est  utile.     But— 
The  art  of  writing,  ars  scrlbendl, 

2.  That  for  the  phrase  "  without  doing  anything,"  or  the  like, 
some  other  form  of  expression  must  be  used  :  as,  for  example, 

I  went  away  witliout  effecting  my  object,  abii  re  Infectd. 
He  came  witliout  warning,  inoplndtus  venit, 
I  did  this  without  knowing  it,  hoc  Insciens  feci. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   They  considered  that  two-years  were  enough  to  accom- 

duco^  bientiuim  ad  con- 

plish   these   things.  —  2.   Thus   they  were   better-prepared    to 

/icio  3  pa  rdtus 

undergo  all  dangers.  —  3.    Convinced  by  these  things,  Caesar 

subeo  adduce  ^ 

decided  that  he  must  not  wait."  —  4.  If  anything  should-happen* 

staiuo^  (dat.)  exspecto'^  quid  accido'^ 

to  the  Romans,  he  has  the  strongest  hope  of  holding  the  royal- 

sjinunus        spes  obtineo'^  reg- 

power  by-means-of  the  Helvetii.  —  5.    Caesar  takes  his  hand, 

tiutn  per  prendo^  dextra 

consoles  [him,  and]  begs  [him]  to-make  *  an  end  of  entreaty. 

consolor  rogo'^  finis  oro^ 

—  6.   The  Helvetii  sent  ambassadors  for-the-sake  of  seeking 

causa"^  peto"^ 

peace.  —  7.    Caesar  provided-for  making   a   bridge   upon    the 

euro  ^  pons 

Arar.  —  8.  The  praetor  appointed  decemvirs  for  marking-out  the 

creo^  decemvir  tnetior^ 

Samnite  territory.  —  9.   The  laws  of  the  Cretans  train  [their] 

Sainnis  ager  lex  Cretes       erudio^ 

youth  by  tasks,  by  hunting,  running,  fasting,  thirst,  cold,  [and] 

juventus  labor  venor^         curro^        esurio^      sitio^      algeo^ 

heat.  — 10.    Caesar  had  everything  to  do   at-once  :    to  display 

aestuo'^  (dat.)  ago'^  Uno  tempore  prdpdno^ 

a.  Impersonal  passive:   §  232(0.353;  H.  388).  — ^.  Present  subjunctive. 


Subjunctive :   Independent  Uses,  33 

the  battle-flag,  to  signal  with  the  trumpet,  to  call-back  the  men 

vexilhcm^  signum  do'^  tuba  revoco^  miles 

from  work,  to  draw-up  the  line,  to  cheer  the  men,  [and]  give 

ab         opus  instruo^  acies  cohortor^ 

the  signal." 

Write  in  Liatin. 

1.  The  consul  gives  heed^  to  propitiating"  the  gods. 

2.  All  hope  of  taking  the  town  was  lost. 

3.  Caesar  perceives''  that    the    war   must  be  put-off^  till-^ 
summer. 

4.  The  consul  gave  Fabius  one  legion  to  lead  into  Spain. 

5.  Conon  provided-for  ^  the  repair'^  of  the  walls  of  Athens. 

6.  A  short  time*  of  life  is  [long]  enough  to-^'  live  well  and 
happily. 

7.  By  always  obeying  the  magistrates,  the  youth  won*  [them- 
selves] good  fame. 

8.  The  grass ^  here  is  very  convenient"^  for  sleeping. 

9.  You  have  lost  much  time  in  play. 


III.  —  Moods  and  Tenses. 

Lesson    19. 

Subjunctive:  Independent  Uses. 

The  Independent  uses  of  the  Subjunctive  are  the 
follov^ing  :  — 

1.  Of  Exhortation  or  Command  :  §  266  (G.  256.  i,  2,  3;  H.  483. 
i.  ii.); 

2.  Of  Prohibition  :  §  269.  a  (G.  264,  266,  with  2,  264.  ii.  ;  H.  483. 

3  ;  488,  489) ; 

3.  Of  Wish :  §  267  (G.  253,  255  ;  H.  484.  ii-)  ; 

4.  Of  Doubt  or  Interrogation:  §  268  (G.  251,  258:   H.  486.  ii.). 

a.  Use  the  passive  construction.  —  b.  opera.  —  c.  placo}-  —  d.  animadve?'to.^ 
—  e.  differo. — f,  ad. — g.  euro}-  —  h.  reficlo? — i.  spatlum. — /.  ad.  —  k.  ad- 
seqiior?  —  /.  gramen.  —  m.  commodus. 


34  Latin  Composition. 

Remark.  —  To  these  may  be  added  the  so-called  Potential  Sub- 
junctive :  §  311.  a  (G.  250,  252,  with  R.* ;  H.  485,  486.  i.),  though 
strictly  belonging  to  the  construction  of  Conditional  Sentences. 

Notice  especially  the  use  of  velim,  etc.,  in  expressions  of  Wish: 
§  267.  c  (G.  254,  R.'^)  ;  also,  the  use  of  ne  in  prohibitions. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.    [Granted  that]  this  is  false  if-you-will;   at-least  it  is  not 

(plur.)        falstis  sane  certe 

harmful. —  2.   I  would-rather  that  you  be  good  than  seem  [so]. 

molest  us  rndlo  videor  ^ 

—  3.  This,  in-truth,  I  may  assert,"  without  any  hesitation,  that 

vera  conjirvio'^  iillus       dtibitatio 

eloquence  is  the  one  thing  most  difficult  of  all.  —  4.  What  can 
you  do  with^  this  man? — 5.   If  you  are''  resolved  to  do  [this], 

certt^s 

do    [it]  ;   but  do  not  afterwards  throw  the  blame  on  me.  — 

vertim  post  con/ero  culpa 

6.    Pardon  nothing,  do  nothing  for  the  sake  of  favor,  be  not 

Ignosco  causa  gratia 

disturbed  by  pity.  —  7.    [Suppose]  a  good  man  to  sell  ^  a  house 

comnioveo'^    niisericordia  vendo^ 


on-account-of    some    faults   which   he-himself    knows,"   others 

propter  vitiunt  nosco^  ceterus 

do  not;   [suppose]  it-^  to  be  "^  pestilential  and  to  be  esteemed '^ 

Igiwro  pestilens  habeo  ^ 

wholesome  ;   [suppose]  it  is-not-known  "^  that  vermin-''  turn-up  in 

salubris  ignoro '  serpens        appdreo  ^ 

all  the  bedchambers ;   [that  it  is]  ill  timbered  [and]  rickety,  — 

cubiculum  jnale  nidteridtus  •     rulnosus 

but  no-one  knows  "^  this  except  the  owner. 

nemo  scio^  praeter  dovii7i7is. 

Write  in  liatin. 

1.  Let  the  advantage^  of  the  commonwealth  prevail* 

2.  Let  us  accordingly'  bring-up-'"  [our]  child   with   every 
indulgence. 

a.  Perfect.  —  b.  See  <J  244.  a?  (G.  396.  R.^ ;  H. 415.111). —  <:.  "Itis."  —  d.  These 
verbs  are  all  in  the  hortatory  subjunctive.  —  e.  Perf,.subj. — /  Plural. — g.  iitUi- 
tas.  —  h.  valeo?-  —  i.  proitide.  — j.  nutrio.^ 


Sequence  of  Tenses.  35 

3.  This  thou  shalt  do'' :  this  thou  shalt  not  do.* 

4.  Let  hin>  write  to  me  what  he  has  done.^ 

5.  I  could  not  easily  say*  that  this  is  better. 

6.  I  wish^  [that]  Athens  may  conquer.'' 

7.  This  thing  may  [perhaps]  seem  absurd"^  to  you. 

8.  Some-one*  may  [perhaps]  think  that  I  am-wrong.-^ 

9.  No  one  can  easily  restrain*  Csesar  from  victory. 

10.  I  would-rather'^  be  at  home  than  abroad.'^ 

1 1 .  Suppose  your  friend  should  fall  sick '  or  die,  what  will 
you  do? 

12.  Let  justice  be  done  [though]  heaven  fall. 


Lesson   20. 

Sequence  of  Tenses.' 

Note.  —  It  is  to  be  observed  {a)  that  the  rule  for  the  Sequence 
of  Tenses  applies  only  to  the  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  in  subordi- 
nate constructions  ;  and  (b)  that  the  rule  in  Latin  (with  one  or  two 
qualifications)  is  the  same  as  in  English. 

1.  Learn  the  definitions  of  Primary  (or  Principal)  and 
Secondary  (or  Historical)  tenses,  with  the  rule  for  the 
Sequence  of  Tenses:  §§  285,  286  (G.  216;  H.  491). 

2.  Notice  the  use  of  secondary  tenses  (chiefly  the 
Liiperfect)  after  primary  :  viz.,  — 

1.  With  the  historical  present :  §  287.  ^  (G.  511,  R.^ ;  H.  495.  ii.). 

2.  With  the  perfect  definite:  id.  a  (G.  511.  r.'^;   H.  495.  i). 

Also,  the  application  of  the  rule  in  — 

3.  The  Imperfect  oi  general  assertions :  id.  d. 

Note.  —  The  dependent  verbs  in  the  following  examples  (after 
"  so-that,"  "  as-if,^'  &c.,  are  all  to  be  in  the  subjunctive  mood. 

a,  Fut.  imperat.  —  b.  Perf.  subj.  —  c.  Pres.  subj. —  d.  absurdus.  —  e.  quispiam. 
f.  .^/'v-f  1  (infin.). — g,   7nalim.  —  h.  /oris. —  /.  in  morbum  cadere. 


36  Latin   Co^nposition. 

Oral   Kxercises. 

I.    It-is-impossible-that "^  many  should  lose   [their]  propert 

am  it  to-''  res 

without  ^  dragging  more  with-them  into  the   same  disaster.  - 

traho^  calamitas 

2.  The  king  was  so  cruel,  that  he  spared  not  his-own  son. - 

adeo  saevus  temper o"^ 

3.  Our  [men]  took-by-assault  [their]  ships,  one-by-one,  so-th; 

expiigtio  ^  singuli  tit 

very-few    out-of   the  whole  number  got ""  to  land.  —  4.    [E 

Perpauci  omm's  pervenio^ 

says]  the  Helvetii  have  been  so  trained  by  their  ancestors,  th, 

(ace.)  instituo^  nidjores  u 

they  are-used °  to  receive  hostages,  not  give  [them],  —  5.  Cicei 

cofisuesco  ^  accipio  ^ 

says  that  he  has  withdrawn  from  [his]  country,  so-as-to  ave 

excedo'^  ex  patria  ut  avert 

civil  war.  —  6.    We  seem  to  have  advanced  so-far,  that  we  ai 

civilis  prqficio'^      ta7itus 

not  ^  surpassed  by  the   Greeks  even  ^  in  wealth  of  words.  - 

vi'nco'^  Graectis  copia  verbictn 

7.    He  shuns  every  gathering  of  men,  just-as-if  he  were  odioi 

coetus  quasi  (pres.)     inviS7, 

to  everybody.  —  8.   From  his  own  misfortunes  he  learned  ho 

omiiis  in/ortuniitfii  disco^ 

uncertain  is  all  hope  of  the  future.  —  9.    He  strengthens  th 

incerttis    (subj.)  spes  res  futUrae  comtiiujiio^ 

town,  so-as  to  deliver*  his  fellow-citizens  from  alarm. 

tit  libera'^  clvis  trepidatio 

Write  in  Latiii. 

1.  I  write  that  I  may  admonish  you. 

2.  I  wrote  yesterday  that  I  might  inform  you. 

3.  He  runs-away-^  as  if  he  were  ^  frightened. 

4.  He  undertook  this  task  as  if  he  were  a  good  workman.* 

5.  I  will  come  to-morrow  to-see  *  you. 

6.  We  went  out  yesterday  to  see '  the  battle. 

7.  I  have  toiled-^'  so-long^'  that  I  am  completely  tired-out.* 

a.  Use  non  possunt.  —  b.  Use  ut  non,  with  pres.  subj.  —  c.  Perfect  subj.- 
d.  Use  ne  .  .  .  guldem.  —  e.  Imp.:  ^  287.  d. — /  effugioj^ — g.  Present  subj. - 
h.  faber.  —  /.  w/,  with  subj. — j.  laboro^  —  k.  tarn  diu. —  /.  defes^us. 


Conditio7tal  Sentences.  37 

8.  Caesar  was  so  merciful''  that  not  even  [his]  beaten^  ene- 
mies "  feared  him. 

9.  This  man  is  so  ^  just  that  no  one  ever  feared  ^  to  confide 
in  him. 

10.  A  painful  experience  has  taught  [us],  how  sad  [a  thing] 
is  the  loss  of  fortune.-'' 

Lesson   2 1 . 

Conditional  Sentences, 

The  forms  of  Conditions,  which  should  be  carefully 
distinguished,  are  the  following  :  — 

1.  Simple  Conditions  —  any  tense  of  the  Indicative:  §  306  (G. 
597;  H.  508); 

2.  Future  Conditions — Future  Indicative  or  Present  Subjunc- 
tive :  §  307,  with  a^  b,  and  c  (G.  597,  598 ;   H.  508,  509)  ; 

3.  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact  —  Past  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  : 
§  308  (G.  599;  H.  510,  with  I). 

a.  Notice  carefully  the  precise  nature  of  the  condition  to  be 
rendered  into  Latin.     Thus  — 

If  he  is  now  alive  (Present),  si  nunc  vlvit.    But — 
If  he  is  alive  to-morrow  (Future),  si  eras  vlvet. 

If  he  were  here  now  (Present),  si  nunc  adesset.    But  — 
If  he  were  to  come  to-morrow  (Future),  si  eras  veniat, 

b.  Notice  especially  the  use  of  the  Present  Subjunctive,  cor- 
responding to  the  English  should  and  would.     Thus  — 

If  you  should  come  to-morrow  you  would  see  (Future),  si 

eras  venias,  videas.    Compare  — 
If  you  were  here  now  you  would  see  (Contrary  to  Fact),  si 

nunc  adesses  videres, 

c.  Clauses  with  quasi,  tamquam,  etc.  (as  if,  as  though),  have 
their  verbs  in  the  Subjunctive :  §  312,  with  Rem.  (G.  604;  H.  513. 
and  ii.). 

a.  Clemens.  —  b.  victus. —  c.  inim'tcus.  —  d.  adeo.  —  e.  Perfect  subj. — f.  res 
fatniliaris. 


38  Latin  Composition. 

d.  The  phrase  if  .  .  .  not  is  generally  to  be  rendered  by  nisi ; 
but,  where  the  negative  is  thrown  wdth  emphasis  on  some  single 
word,  SI  .  .  .  non  (neque)  is  to  be  preferred.     Thus  — 

If  I  am  not  mistaken,  nisi  fallor. 

If  Brutus  is  not  a  friend  but  an  enemy  of  Caesar,  si  Brutus 
non  amicus  est  9  sed  inimlcus  Caesar  is. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.    If  [my]  mind  does  not  deceive  me,  misfortune  will  not 

animus  fallo^  infortwiimn 

be-far-away.  —  2.    If  [your]  country  should  discourse  with  you, 

multttm  abesse  patria  loguor'^ 

ought  she  not  to  prevail,  even  if  she  could  not  apply  force  ?  — 

debeo^  impetro'^   etiam.  adhibeo"^    vis 

3.    If  I  should  write"  to  my  brother,   he  w^ould   make-haste 

ad  propero  ^ 

at-once  [for]  Rome.  —  4.  If  I  had^  a  pen  handy,^  I  would  write 

statim.  (ace.)  calamus 

to  Marcus.  —  5.  If  [your]  parents  feared  and  hated  you,  and*' 

parens       itmeo^  odt 

you  could  not  ^  in  any  way  reconcile  them,  you  would  withdraw 

ratio       pldco  ^  concedo  ^ 

somewhere  from  their  sight.  —  6.    If  my  counsel  and  influence 

aliquo  oculus  consilittm  auctoritas 

had  prevailed,  you  would  this  day  be-a-beggar,  we  should  be 

valeo^  tu  hodie  egeo'^ 

free,  the  commonwealth  w^ould  not  have  lost  so -many  generals 

liber  res  piiblica  amitto^        tot  dux 

and  armies. —  7.  The  mind  is  pretty-much  like  iron:    if  you 

exercitus^  mens  prope  utl  ferrum 

ise  [it],*^  it  wears-out^;  if  you  don't  use  it,  it  gathers  rust. — 

exerceo^  contero^  contrako^  robigo 

8.    Then  [said]    I :    *'  What !  -  even  if  he  wanted  you  to  take 

turn  etiamne  volo  fero 

firebrands  to  the  Capitol  ?"    "  Never,"  said  he,  *' would  he  have 

fax  in  Capitolium  itiguam 

wished  [it]."-'' — 9.    At   that   time    you   would    have    thought 

ille    tempus  sentio^ 

differently.-'' —  10.  He  walks  as  if  he  were  lame. 

aliter  ■         a^nbulo'^  claudus  . 

a.  Perfect:  ^  307.  c  (cf.  G.  236.  R.2).  —  b.  adsum. —  c.  neque.  —  d.  Subj.  of 
general  condition:  §  309.  a  (G.  597.  R.^).  —  e.  Passive. — /  Observe  the  im- 
plied condition. 


Time-Clauses.  39 

Write  in  !Latin. 

1.  If  you^see  your  father  to-morrow,  what  will  you  say? 

2.  If  I  had  not  known  that  you  would  come,  I  should  have 
written. 

3.  I  should  not  have  gone"  yesterday,  if  I  had  known. 

4.  If  it  is  as  you  say,  I  was  greatly  mistaken. 
K       5.    I  should  go  to-morro\y  if  you  should  be  ill.^ 

^       6.    Hannibal  would  not  have  fought  at''  Zama  if  he  could 
have  helped "^  [it]. 

7.  I  would  not  have  gone*^  unless  Caesar  had  ordered. 

8.  You  can  always  do  that  if  you  try.^ 

9.  If  it  is  allowed,^  I  shall  be-glad-to ^  speak. 

10.  If  it  would  be  allowed,  I  should  be-glad-to  ^  speak. 

11.  At  another  time  I  might  think '^  so. 

12.  You  speak  as  if  you  thought  I  was,  deceiving  you. 

13.  [If  he  were]  intending-to-return'  home,  he  would  not 
delay-^'  so  long  in  business.* 

14.  A  life  remote  from  the  society  of  men  and  the  protection 
of  laws  would  justly^  be  reckoned"'  wild''  and  dreary.'' 

15.  Without  help  of  tl^  Gauls,  Caesar  could  not  have  over- 
come^ the  Germans. 

16.  In  extreme  poverty^  old  age  cannot  be  a  light  [burden]. 

17.  Your  friend  spoke  of  the  monuments  and  antiquities  as 
if  he  had  lived  a  year  at  Rome. 

Lesson  22. 

Time-Clauses. 

The  use  of  the  Moods  in  clauses  of  Time  {whert^ 
since,  before,  after)  depends  on  the  distinction  of  abso- 
lute and  relative  time  (§  323,  with  Note),  and  may  be 
learned  from  the  rules  given  in  the  grammar  ;  viz.  — 

a.  proficiscor?  —  b.  aegrdto)-  —  c.  ad.  —  d.  defiigio^  —  e.  cojior)-  — f.  licet 
(fut.). — g.  libenter  (adv.).  —  h.  Present  subj.  —  i.  Future  participle. — /.  morory 
— k.  tiegbtior  1  (gerund.) .  —  /.  recte.  —  m.  Present  subj.  —  n.  agrestis.  —  o.  tristis. 
• — /.  super 0^  —  q.  summa  inopia. 


40  Latin  Composition. 

1.  Use  of  ubi,  postquam,  etc.  :  §  324  (G.  563 ;  H.  471.  ii.  4)  ; 

2.  Use  of  cum  temporal:  §  325  (G.  581,  i.  ii.  ;  H.  521)  ; 

3.  Use  of  cum  causal:  §  326  (G.  581.  iii.  ;  H.  517)  ; 

4.  Use  of  antequam    and    priusquam :    §  327   (G.  576,   579; 
H.  520) ; 

5.  Use   of  dum,    donee,    quoad:    §    328   (G.   573,   574,   575  ; 
H.  519). 

To  these  the  following  may  be  added  :  — 

a.  If  WHEN  is  equivalent  to  whenever,  use  the  Indicative  :  as, 

When  I  come  home,  I  busy  myself  writing  letters,  cum 
domuin  verily  operant  do  epistulls  scrlbendls, 

b.  If  the  clauses  are  reversed,  so  that  the  temporal  clause  con- 
tains the  principal  statement,  use  the  Indicative :  as, 

I  was  just  looking  for  you  when  our  friend  came  up,  te  ex~ 
spectdbam,  cum  amicus  noster  advenit. 

c.  If  WHEN  or  WHILE  approaches  in  meaning  to  since  or  though, 
use  the  Subjunctive  :  as. 

But  if  you  do  not  yet  quite  see,  when  the  thing  is  plain  by 
so  many  clear  proofs  and  tokens  (Cic),  quod  si  non- 
dum  satis  cernUis,  cum  res  ipsa  tot  tafu  Claris 
argumentls  slgnlsque  luceat. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   When  fortune  blows-against   [us],  we  are  distressed. — 

fortiina  re^o^  (perf.)  affligo'^ 

2.  When  Verres   heard   this,  he   called  Diodorus  to  him.  — 

ubi  audio  ^ 

3.  Pompey,  as-soon-as   he  saw  his  cavalry  beaten,  withdrew 

Pompeius  ut  equitdtus      pello^  excedo^ 

from   the   hne.  —  4.   When  this   seemed   too- difficult,  and-no 

acies  postquain  videor^  (compar.)  neque 

opportunity  was  offered  for  effecting   [it],  they  went-over  to 

facultds  ^<?^(iinp.)  perficio^  trdnseo 

Pompey.  —  5 .   So  the  woman,  while  she  wished "  to  keep-back 

'  ita  mulier       dtnn  (pres.)  re  tine  o"^ 

a  few  chattels,  lost  all  [her]  fortune.  —  6.  This  had  happened 

tna7icipium  perdo^  (plur.) 

before   we    came-back.  —  7.    Whenever   spring    began,^  Verres 

cum  ver  coepl 


a.  See  ^  276.  e  (G.  572 ;  H.  467.  iii.  4).  —  b.  Insert  "  to  be." 


Time-Clauses.  4 1 

would-give  himself  to  toil  and  travel.  —  8.   The  spring  was  now 

(imperf.)  labor  iter  (plur.)  jam 

coming-on,  when  Hannibal  moved  from  [his]  winter-quarters. 

fnoveo^  hiberna  (pi.) 


—  9.    Sailors  reckon  [it]  a  sign  of  stormy- weather,  when  many 

7iauta         ptito'^  argume7ituni  teinpestas 

meteors  fly-across  [the  sky]. —  10.    Since  life  without  friends  is 

Stella        transvolo  ^ 

full  of  treachery  and  fear,  reason  itself  warns  [us]  to  provide" 

Insidiae  metus^    ratio  moneo"^  paro^ 

friendships.  —  11.  While  in  many  respects  men  are  weaker  than 

cunt  res  Infirttius 

brutes,  in  this  thing  they"  chiefly  excel  [them],  that  they  can 

bestia  maxime  praesto'^  quod 

talk. — 12.  When  Epaminondas  had  beaten  the  Lacedaemonians 

loqnor"^  cum  vinco^  -ius 

at  Mantinea,  and  saw  that  he  was  getting-exhausted  by  a  severe 

aptid  aiqne  .  exaninio'^  gravis 

wound,  he  asked  whether  [his]  shield  was  safe. 

vuhuis'^  -ne  cllpe7is  (suhj.)  salz/us 

Write  in  L.atin. 

1.  When  you  come  (fut.  perf.),  I  shall  go  away.* 

2.  I  was-asleep°  when  the  doctor  came. 

3.  I  had   scarcely  **  read   your   letter,  when  Lentulus  ap- 
proached.* 

4.  When  he  had  said  this,  he  went  away. 

5.  This   he    had   said,    when   news-was-brought-''  that   the 
enemy  were  in  sight,^ 

6.  When  summer  had  begun,*  he  used-to-make  his  quarters' 
at  Syracuse. 

7.  Before  I  reached  home,  my  father  had  already  gone.-'' 

8.  While  he  was  speaking  thus,  his  father  arrived.* 

9.  When  I  come  home  at  night,'  I  take-comfort""  in-doing'* 
nothing. 

10.  As  soon  as  he  saw  his  father  coming,  he  ran-away.** 

1 1 .  Since  the  time  is-near,^'  it  becomes  us  all  to  be  ready. 

a.  Inf.  or  (better)  «/ with  subj.  —  d.  abeo.  —  c.dormio.^ — d.  vlx.  —  e.  appro- 
pinquo^  — /.  nuntio  i  (impers.).  — ^.  conspectus.^  —  k.  Add  "  to  be."  — i.  statlva 
(pi.). — 7.  proficiscor?  —  k.venio.^  —  /.  vesper i.  —  m.    me  dclecto. —  «. Gerund. 

—  0,  effugio?  — /.  adsuni. 


42  Latin  Composition. 

12.  While  I  do  not  believe  him  to  be  a  traitor,  yet  I  distrust 
him. 

13.  Will  you  not  beheve,  when  the  thing  is  so  plain?" 

14.  I  congratulate^  you  that''  you  have  recovered '^  your 
pioperty*  at-last.-^ 

15.  You  will  not^  hear  till  I  have  been  gone  ten  days. 

Lesson  23. 

Purpose  and  Result. 

Clauses  of  Purpose  (Final  Clauses)  and  of  Result 
(Consecutive  Clauses)  require  the  Subjunctive,  as  fol- 
lows :  — 

1.  Purpose,  with  Relative,  ut  (ne)  :  §  317  (G.  544.  i.,  545.  1,3; 
H.  497)  ; 

2.  Result,  with  ut  (ut  non)  :  §  319  (G.  553,  554;  H.  500). 

a.  Observe  the  special  use  of  quo  (for  ut)  after  Comparatives  : 
§  317.  b  (G.  545.  2  ;  H.  497)  ;  of  quominus  after  words  of  Hinder- 
ing:  §  319.  c  (G.  549;  H.  497)  ;  and  of  quin  2SX.Q.X  negative  expres- 
sions of  Doubt  or  Hindrance  :  §  319.  <^  (G.  551  ;  H.  504,  with  3). 
Also,  the  distinction  to  be  observed  in  the  use  of  the  several  expres- 
sions of  Purpose :  §  318.  <a:,  <5,  ^,  d. 

b.  In  Latin,  the  constructions  of  Purpose  and  Result  are  pre- 
cisely alike  in  the  affirmative^  but  in  the  negative  the  former  takes 
ne  and  the  latter  ut  non.     Thus  — 

1.  He  was  guarded  so  that  he  might  not  escape,  custo- 

dltus  est  ne  effugeret, 

2.  He  was  guarded  so  that  he  did  not  escape,  custdclltus 

est  ut  non  effugeret. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I,   The  Helvetil  sent  ambassadors  to  Caesar  to  ask-for  peace. 

legatiis  qui      peto  ^ 

■ —  2.   There  are  many  who  rob  from  some  to  lavish  on-others. 

eripio^  (dat.)    quod largior^        (dat.) 

a.  manifestus.  —  b.  gratulor'^  (dat.). —  c.  quod  (io\\o\iQdi  by  indie). — d.  re- 
cipio?  —  e.  res. — f.  tandem  (before  the  verb). — g.  non  ante  . .  .  quant. 


Purpose  and  Result,  43 

—  3.    Arria  gave  [her]  husband  a  sword  to  kill  himself  with.  — 

tnar'itus  glad  ins    ijitcrjicio^ 

4.    I  do  not  doubt  that"  you  are-glad  of  this  news.  —  5.   Caesar 

dubito'^  gaudeo^  nuntius  (abl.) 

found-out  that  it  was  Afranius's  fault*  that''  he  did  nof  fight.'' 

cognosco  '^ 

' — 6.   I  write"  you  this  for- the -very-reason  that  you  may  not 

t'ded 

suppose-''  I  have  forgotten  your  message.  —  7.    So-great  is  the 

puto'^  obliviscor"^  tnandatum  (pi.)  tantus 

power  of  integrity,  that  we  love  it  even  in  an  enemy.  —  8.   You 

VIS  probitas  dlligo^      etiam 

were  so  far  off  that  I  could  not  hear. 


Write  in  liAtin. 

1.  ^neas,  that  he  might  v/in^  the  hearts  of  the  Aborigines, 
called  both  the  nations  Latins. 

2.  Romulus,  lest  the  greatness  of  the  city  should  be  void,'^ 
opened  a  certain  place  [as]  an  asylum. 

3.  The  Clusians  sent  ambassadors  to  Rome,  to  ask  aid  from 
the  Senate. 

4.  I  sent  [a  man]  to  Antony,  to'  tell  [him]  this. 

5.  A  pen-''  was  given  me  to  write  with.* 

6.  He  lived  honorably,  that  ^  he  might  quit"*  life  with  a  more 
calm  mind. 

7.  Again  and  again  I  beg  you  to  do  it. 

8.  Thrice  I  have  begged  you  to  come  as-soon-as-possible.'* 

9.  What  prevents  you  from  coming  at-once?*" 

10.    I  shall  not  prevent  your  returning  home  to-morrow. 


a.  Use  qiiin,  —  b.  per  A.  staj'e.  —  c.  qudminus.  —  d.  Passive  impersonal.  — 
e.  Epistolary  imperfect:  §  282  (G.  244;  H.  472.  i). — f.  Imp.  subj. — g.  sibi 
conciliare.  —  h.  vanus.  —  i.  qui.  — j.  calamus.  —  k.  quo  scrlberem.  —  /.  quo.  — 
m.  excedo^  a.  —  n.  quam  prlmum. —  0.  statlm. 


44  Latin  Composition. 

PART    SECOND. 
I.  —  Substantive   Clauses. 

( Indirect  Discourse . ) 

Lesson  24. 

Accusative  and  Infinitive :  —  !• 

I.  Learn  the  rule  for  the  use  of  the  Infinitive  with 
Subject-Accusative:  §  272  (G.  527;    H.  535.  i). 

a.  This  form  is  to  be  employed  in  Latin  in  cases  where  a  simple 
statement  of  fact  is  introduced  in  English  by  that,  following  a  verb 
of  saying,  &c.     Thus  — 

He  says  that  tlie  mountain  is  hi^ld  by  the   enemy,    dlcit 
montefu  ah  hostibus  tenerl. 

Here  the  actual  words  of  the  speaker  were :  mons  ab  hostibus 
tenetur,  t/ie  moimtain  is  held  by  the  enemy.  In  indirect  discourse 
the  subject  mons  becomes  accusative,  montem,  and  the  verb 
tenetur  is  put  in  the  infinitive,  teneri. 

b.  In  these  cases,  the  infinitive,  with  subject-accusative,  is  the 
Object  of  the  verb,  and  is  called  a  Substantive  Clause  :  §§  329,  330' 
(G.  523.  R.\  527;  H.  S^iZ-SZS-  0-     1^0^  example  — 

He  says  [that]  he  knows  [that]  those  things  are  true,  dlcit 
scire  se  ilia  esse  vera. 

Here  the  object  of  dicit  is  the  clause  scire  .  .  .  vera;  the  object 
of  scire  is  ilia  .  .  .  vera.  Standing  by  itself,  it  would  be  :  ilia  sunt 
vera,  those  things  are  true ;  and  in  making  this  the  object  of  scit, 
he  knows,  the  nominative  ilia  become^  accusative,  and  the  verb 
sunt  becomes  the  infinitive  esse.  But  again,  scit  ilia  esse  vera 
is  made  the  object  of  dicit,  when  scit  becomes  scire,  and  its  subject 
is  put  in  the  accusative. 

Note.  —  In  clauses  of  this  kind,  the  word  that  is  often  omitted 
in  English,  as  in  the  above  examples. 


Accusative  and  Infinitive.  45 

c.  If  the  subject  of  scit  is  the  same  as  the  subject  of  dicit,  —  that 
is,  if  the  speaker  says  that  he  himself  Vno^^^  —  the  reflexive  pro- 
noun must  be  used,  because  this  refers  to  the  subject  of  the  princi- 
pal verb;  so  we  have  dicit  se  scire,  etc.,  he  says  that  he  himself 
knows.  But  if  the  speaker  is  talking  about  somebody  else,  the 
accusative  of  is,  ille,  or  hie  must  be  used.  Thus,  dicit  eum  scire 
would  mean,  he  (Marcus)  says  that  he  (Caius)  knows.  So  dico 
me  scire,  I  say  that  I  know ^  &c.  The  sentence  here  analyzed  illus- 
trates the  common  case  of  one  accusative  with  the  infinitive  depend- 
ing upon  another. 

d.  Some  verbs  require  the  reflexive  in  Latin  which  do  not  in 
English ;  thus,  simulat  se  esse  bonum,  he  pretends  to  be  good. 
So  sometimes  verbs  of  desiring;  as,  cupio  me  esse  clementem, 
/  desire  to  be  merciful. 

2.  For  the  use  of  Tenses  in  Indirect  Discourse, 
learn  §  288  (G.  530;  H.  541-543).     Thus — 

1.  For  incomplete,  indefinite,  or  contemporary  action  : 

He  says  that  he  knows,  now,  dicit  se  scire;  but 
He  said  tliat  he  knew,  then,  dixit  se  scire;  and 
He  used  to  say  that  he  knew,  dlcehat  se  scire;  or. 
He  was  saying,  &c.,  when  something  else  occurred. 
He  says  that  he  is  laughing,  now,  dicit  se  rldere; 
He  said  that  he  was  laughing,  then,  dixit  se  rldere. 

Note.  —  The  defective  verb  inquam  is  regularly  used,  par  en- 
ihetically,  with  direct  quotations.  All  other  verbs  of  saying,  &c., 
—  as  dico,  nego,  respondeo,  —  are  in  general  followed  by  Indirect 
Discourse. 

2.  For  complete  action: 

He  says  that  he  has  laughed  (but  has  ceased),  dicit  se  rlsisse; 
He  said  that  he  had  laughed  (but  had  ceased),  dlooit  se  rlsisse. 

3.  For  future  action  : 

He  says  that  he  will  come,   dicit  se  venturum  [esse]; 
He  said  that  he  would  come,  dixit  se  venturum. 


46  Latin  Composition. 

Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  We  know  that  Caesar  will  be  absent. 

2.  You  think  that  he  was  your  enemy. 

3.  He  says  that  he  is  well. 

4.  He  supposed  that  Marcus  would  not  come. 

5.  I  saw  that  the  army  was  approaching. 

6.  They  thought  we  should  be"  absent. 

7.  I  feel  that  I  have  been  merciful. 

8.  Caesar  understood  that  I  had  been  his  friend. 

9.  I  pretended  to  be  mad. 

10.  He  pretends  to  be  your  friend. 

1 1 .  We  are  mindful  that  we  are  mortal. 

12.  There  was  a  rumor ^  that  Caesar  was  dead. 

Lesson  25. 

Accusative  and  InflnitiYe :  —  2. 

The  General  Rules  for  the  use  of  Tenses  in  Indirect 
Discourse  have  been  given  in  the  preceding  lesson  ; 
but  certain  verbs  require  special  attention. 

a.  After  verbs  o(  hoping,  promising,  and  tindertaking,  the  Future 
Infinitive  should  be  used  only  when  the  action  is  future  relatively  to 
the  predicate.     Thus  — 

I  hope  that  you  will  come,  spero  te  ventm^uiu  esse  ;  but, 
I  hope  that  you  are  well,  spero  te  valere. 

Remark.  —  Notice  that  when  the  person  performing  the  action 
is  the  same  as  the  person  hoping,  &c.,  the  reflexive  pronoun  must 
be  used.     Thus  — 

I  promise  to  come,  polliceor  me  venturum  [esse]; 
You  promise  to  come,  polliceris  te  venturum  ; 
He  promises  to  come,  pollicetui^  se  venturum, 

a.  Should  in  this  sentence  represents  shall  of  the  actual  thought,  becoming 
past  after  the  past  tense  thought.  The  original  expression  would  be  "  we  shall 
be  absent."  Use  the  future  infinitive.  —  b.  The  infinitive  clause,  in  this  case,  is 
sometimes  called  the  object  of  the  verbal  phrase  rumor  erat ;  but  is,  more 
strictly,  the  predicate  after  erat :  see  \  272.  Rem. 


Accusative  and  Infinitive.  47 

b.  On  the  other  hand,  memini  and  similar  verbs  use  the  present 
infinitive  for  a  past  action,  when  it  is  an  action  actually  witnessed 
by  the  person  speaking.     Thus  — 

I  remember  that  Caesar  was  present  (I  myself  having  witnessed 

it),  ineminl  Caesar  em  adesse ;  but, 
I  remember  that  Caesar  conquered  Gaul  (having  learned  the  fact 

from  others),  meminl  Caesar  em  Galliam  vlcisse. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  I  hope  that  Caesar  will  come.  —  2.  I  hope  to  come. — 
3.  He  promised  that  I  should  have  a  province.  —  4.  He  prom- 
ised to  give  me  a  province.  —  5.  He  said  that  Marcus  was- 
absent."  —  6.  He  said  that  Marcus  had  been  absent.  —  7.  He 
hopes  to  meet^  us.  —  8.  He  thinks  that  we  shall  meet  Cato. — 
9.  He  promised  that  we  should  meet  Cato.  —  10.  They  de- 
clared that  we  had-been-neglected.''-^  11.  I  think  that  she  has 
been  neglected. —  12.  I  thought  that  she  was  neglected. — 
13.    I  remember  that  you  were-present.'' 

Translate  into  Iiatin. 

1.  I  hope  that  King  Deiotarus  will  send  ambassadors  to  us. 

2.  We  hope  that  you  are  no-longer  distressed  in  mind. 

3.  He  promises  speedily  to  come  with  all  his*  forces  to  our 
camp. 

4.  Sextus  Roscius  demanded  two  of  [his]  father's  slaves 
for  (ad)  torture  :  don't -^  you  remember  that  Titus  Roscius 
refused  ? 

5 .  You  remember  that  I  so  laid-out  the  case  in  the  beginning. 

6.  Who  promised  that  we  should  see  the  ocean  to-day? 

7.  He  thinks  that  you  have  not-yet  written  the  letter. 

8.  He  thinks  that  you  have  not-yet  written-out  the  oration. 

9.  The  consul  supposed  that  the  enemy  had  already 
crossed  the  river ;  the  enemy  waited,  hoping  that  the  consul 
would  lead  his  forces  across. 

a.  absum.  —  b.  convenio^  —  c.  77eglego?  —  d.  adsimi.  —  e.  The  possessive 
is  not  to  be  expressed  unless  for  emphasis  or  to  avoid  ambiguity ;  but  subs, 
etc.,  may  mean  "his  forces."— -yC  -ne :  \  210.  d  (II.  351.  2). 


48  Latin   Composition. 

10.  I  hope  that  you  will  be  even  firmer. 

11.  What  did  you  suppose  that  those"  said  who  saw^  [this]  ? 
what  [did  you  suppose]  that  those  thought  who  heard  ^  it  ? 

12.  The  Carnutes  declare  that  they  shrink  from  no  peril,  and 
the  chiefs  promise  to  make  war. 

Lesson  26. 

Accusative  and  Infiuitive  :  —  3. 

In  the  following  points  the  Latin  usage  differs  from 
the  English  :  — 

a.  The  word  which  governs  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is 
sometimes  omitted,  being  implied  in  a  preceding  expression :  §  330. 
e  (G.  652.  N.^;     H.  523.  Note)  :  as, 

Tlie  ^duans  send  deputies  to  Caesar  to  ask  for  help,  [saying] 
that  they  had  deserved  so  well,  &c.,  Aedul  legdtos 
ad  Caesarem  inittunt,  rogdtum  audcilium;  ita  se 
meruisse,  etc. 

b.  When  the  statement  is  in  the  form  of  a  denial  of  the  fact  con- 
tained in  the  object-clause,  nego  is  commonly  used  instead  of  dicq 
.  .  .  non.     Thus  — 

I  am  well,  valeo  ;  He  says  that  he  is  well,  ait  se  valere, 
I  am  not  well,  non  valeo;   He  says  that  he  is  not  well, 

negat  se  valere  (instead  of  ait  se  non  valere,  which 

would  be  grammatically  correct). 

c.  A  Relative  or  other  subordinate  Clause  in  indirect  discourse 
(except  where  merely  explanatory)  lias  its  verb  in  the  Subjunctive : 
§  336(0.  653;  H.  524).     Thus  — 

He  said  [that]  these  were  [the  men]  whom  lie  had  seen,  dl^xlt 
hos  esse  quos  vldisset. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  I  am  very  much  offended.  —  2.  I  said  that  I  was  not 
offended.  —  3.    He  did  not  say  that  he  was  a  Roman  citizen. — 

a.  is,  the  proper  pronoun  to  use  as  antecedent  to  a  relative,  —  b.  Subjunctive. 


Special  Constructions,  49 

4.  I  said  that  he  was  not  a  Roman  citizen.  —  5.  They  said 
that  they  should  not  follow.  —  6.  He  says  this  is  the  dog  he 
bought  yesterday. 

emo^  hert  Translate   into  ILatin. 

1.  He  says  that  you  cannot  write  to  me. 

2.  He  says  that  you  could  not  {were  7iot  able  to)  write  to  me. 

3.  He  said  that  you  could  not  (at  that  time)  write  to  me. 

4.  He  said  that  you  could  not  have  written  to  me."* 

5.  They  rejoice  at  having  learned^  (that   they   themselves 
have  learned ) . 

6.  King  Deiotarus  sent  ambassadors  to  me,  [saying]  that 
he  would  come  with  all  his  forces  into  my  camp. 

7.  I  hear  that   you    are    distressed  in  mind,  and  that  the 
physician  says  you  suffer  from""  this. 

8.  He  said  that  the  city  which   be    had   visited   was   not 
sufficiently  fortified. 

9.  He  did  not  say  that  the  city  was  sufficiently  fortified. 

10.  They  hope  soon  to  finish  the  work  they  began''  yesterday. 

11.  Who  can  deny^  that  all  these  [things]  which  we  see 
(indie.)  are  ruled  by  the  power  of  the  gods? 

12.  He  despairs^  [he  says]  not  only  of  {cTe)  royal-power, 
but  even  of  that  power  which  he  has  (subj.). 

Lesson  27. 

Special  Constructions. 

Besides  the  simple  narrative  of  Indirect  Discourse, 
several  Special  Constructions  require  to  be  noticed. 
These  are  — 

1.  Questions:  §  338  (G.  654.  R. ;  H.  523.  ii.  2); 

2.  Commands  :   §  339  (G.  655  ;  H.  id.  iii.)  ; 

3.  Conditions:  §  337  (G.  659.  i,  2;  H.  527). 

a.  Could  not  have  written  =  were  not  able  to  zvrite  ;  therefore  use  perf.  infin. 
oi  possum,  \\\\S\  pres.  infin.  of  scr'ibo. — b.  Sec  §  333.  b  (G.  533;  H.  535.  iii.). 
—  c.  ex.  —  d.  ineipiofi  If  the  indicative- is  used  here,  it  will  mean,  the  work 
whicli  (as  we  know)  they  actually  beifau  ;  if  the  subjunctive,  that  which  (as  they 
sa\ )  ihcy  began.  -  -  e.  Prt^s,  subj,  —  f.   Indirect  discourse. 


50  Latin   Composition, 

a.  Questions  are  sometimes  in  the  accusative  and  infinitive, — 
especially  the  accusative  of  the  Future  Participle,  esse  being  under- 
stood.    Thus  — 

Who   (said  they)    will    dare   to   succeed   Alexander  ?    que^n 
ausurum  Alexandro  succedere  ? 

b.  The  phrase  would  have  been,  or  the  like,  is  to  be  expressed  in 
indirect  discourse  by  the  Future  Participle  with  fuisse.     Thus  — 

I  should  have  come  if  I  had  been  well,  venissein  {=  ven- 

turns  eram)  si  valuissem. 
He  wrote  that  he  would  have  come  if  he  had  not  been  sick, 

scrlpsit  se  venturuin  fuisse,  nisi  aegrotdsset. 

Note.  —  In  the  exercises  below,  the  Question  or  Command  is 
generally  given  in  the  direct  form.  The  student  should,  accordingly, 
change  the  form  to  that  of  indirect  discourse,  putting  all  the  verbs 
in  the  third  person,  and  assuming  a  verb  of  saying  or  asking  in  the 
past  tense.  It  may  be  well  to  write  the  sentences  first  in  the  direct 
form,  comparing  those  given  under  §  339  (G.  664).  If  they  should 
prove  too  difficult,  they  may  be  left  till  the  review. 

"Write   in   Latin. 

1 .  Ariovistus,  when  I "  was  consul,  sought  most  eagerly  the 
friendship  of  the  Roman  people  :  why  does  any-one  so  hastily 
suppose  that  he  will  withdraw  from  [his]  duty  ?  I  for-my-part  * 
am  persuaded '^  that  he  will  cast-off  neither  my  good-will  nor 
[that]  of  the  Roman  people. 

2.  But  if,  driven  by  rage  and  madness,  he  should  bring  "^  w^ar, 
pray  what  are  you  afraid-of^? 

3.  If  any  are  troubled  by-^  the  defeat^  and  flight  of  the 
Gauls,  they,  if  they  ask,  can  find,  that  while  *  the  Gauls  were 
worn-out  by  the  length  of  the  war,  Ariovistus,  having  kept'  him- 
self for  many  months  in  camp  and  in  swamp,  and  having  given 
no  chance  at  him,-^' attacked^  [them]  suddenly,  hopeless  [as  they 
were]  of  battle  and  dispersed,  [and]  conquered  [them]  more 
by  skill'  and  strategy'  than  by  valor. 

a.  Abl.  abs.  with  w^.  —  b.  quidem. —  c.  Impersonal  with  Dative.  —  d.  infero 
(pluperfect).  —  e.  vereor?' — f.  Use  the  active  construction. — g.  adversum 
proeUiun  (nom.). —  h.  Ablative  absolute.  —  i.  Clause  with  cum. — /.  sul  potes- 
tatcm  facere.  —  k.  adorior^  (participial  construction). —  /.  7-af:o,  c-jj:silhi!n. 


Indirect  Questions.  51 

4.  But  if,  besides,  no  one  shall  follow,  still  I  will  go  with  the 
tenth  legion  alone,  about  which  I  have  no  misgiving,  and  this 
shall  be  my  (dat.)  body-guard." 

5.  If  you  persist  in  pursuing  (inf.)  [us]  with  war,  remember 
the  old  disaster  of  the  Roman  people,  and  the  ancient  valor  of 
the  Helvetians.  Do  not  allow ^  that  place  where  we  have  stood'' 
to  take  [its]  name  from  the  calamity  of  the  Roman  people  and 
the  slaughter  of  [their]  army. 

6.  Who  [said  they]  will  give  the  signal  in- our-re treat '^  ?  who 
will  dare  to  succeed  Alexander  ?  Suppose  *  we  penetrate  as-far- 
as  {ad)  the  Hellespont  in  [our]  flight,  who  will  prepare  a  fleet  in 
which  we  may  cross-over? 

Anecdotes. 

1.  The  mother-^  of  Phalaris  —  writes  Ponticus  Heraclides,  a 
learned  man,  a  hearer  and  disciple  of  Plajo  —  appeared  to  see 
in  [her]  sleep  (plur.)  the  images  of  the  gods,  which  she  had 
consecrated  in-her-house ;  of  {ex)  these  Mercury  seemed  from 
a  bowl  which  he  held  in  his  right  hand  to  pour  blood,  which, 
when  it  reached^  the  ground  seemed  to  boil-up,^  so  that  the 
whole  house  overflowed  with  blood.  This'  dream  of  the  mother 
was  made-good-^'  by  the  monstrous  cruelty  of  [her]  son. 

2.  Publius  Scipio,-^  the  same  who  was  first  called  Africanus, 
used  to  say  —  [as]  Cato  has  written,  who  was  nearly  of-his-time  * 
—  that  he  was  never  less  idle^  than  when  at-leisure,^and-never"' 
less  alone  than  when  he  was  alone. 

Lesson  28. 

Indirect  Questions. 

Note.  —  For  the  forms  of  interrogation  in  Simple  Sentences,  see 
Lesson  3. 

I.  An  interrogative  expression  may  be  incorporated 
in  the  main  sentence  as  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb, 

a.  practoria  cohors.  —  b.    committere  lit.  —  c.    consistofi —  d.  fugieiitibus. — 
■lit. — /   Indirect  discourse  depending  on  j-<;r^^^r^.  —  g.   attingo^  {y^\\i\>.). — 
h.   refervesco.^  —  i.  Relative. — /    coinprobo^  :   use  the  active  construction.— 
k.  aequalis,  with  genitive.  —  /,  otlbsus.  —  in.  nee. 


52  Latin  Composition, 

thus  becoming  a  substantive  clause.  In  this  case  it  ij 
called  an  Indirect  Question,  and  its  verb  is  in  the  sub 
junctive:  §  334  (G.  469;  H.  529).     Thus  — 

I  see  who  has  the  book,  video  quis  lihrum  habeat. 

Note.  —  Here  the  form  of  direct  question  would  be,  gz/is  librum 
habet  ?    Other  examples  are  — 

quantum  hahes?  —  die  mihi  quantum  habeas, 
unde  venis?  —  neseio  unde  venids, 
nufn  Momdnus  es  ?  —  rogo  num  Romdnus  sis, 
nonne  hoc  vides  ?  —  quaerit  nonne  hoc  videds, 

a.    In  indirect  questions  num  has  the  same  force  as  -ne. 

d.  The  interrogative  expression  may  be  made  the  subject  of  the 
verb :  as,  iion  constat  quis  habeat  Etruriam,  it  is  not  known 
who  has  Etrtiria,  where  the  clause  quis  .  .  .  Etruriam  is  subject  of 
constat. 

2.  Alternative  questions,  like  simple  ones,  can  be 
made  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb,  and  in  this  case 
take  the  subjunctive  as  Indirect  Questions  :  thus  — 

I  do  not  know  whether  it  was  Caesar  or  Pompey,  neseio 
utrum  Caesar  fuerit  an  Po^npeius, 

It  is  not  clear  whether  we  have  peace  or  war,  bellum  pd- 
cemne  Jiabedmus  non  constat. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Who  will"  go  with  me*?  —  2.  What''  soldier  will  go  with 
us?  —  3.  Will  any  one '^  follow  Caesar?  —  4.  He  does  not  say 
who  will  go  with  you.  —  5.  I  do  not  know  whether  any  one  will 
go  with  us.  —  6.  I  asked  whether  you  had  seen  Marcus.  —  7.  I 
wished  to  know  whether  you  were  absent.  —  8.  Will  you^  come, 
or  I? —  9.  Do  you  give  us  peace  or  war? —  10.  Is  Caesar  to  be 
king  or  not  ?  —  11.   I  do  not  know  whether  Caesar  is  to  be  king 

a.  =  wishes  to  go.  —  b.  mecmn:  ^  99.  e  (G.  414.  R.i ;  H.  184.  2). —  c.  ^  104. 
a  (H.  188.  I ;  G.  104,  first  two  lines).  —  d.  num  quis  or  ecquis.  —  e.  "  You "  must 
be  expressed,  as  it  is  contrasted  with  "  I." 


Other  Forms  of  Substantive  Clause.  53 

or  emperor.  — 12.  He  did  not  say  whether  he  was  Nero  or 
not. —  13.  When  did  you  come? — 14.  I  ask  you  when  you 
came.  —  15.   I  asked  you  when  you  came. 

Translate  into  Liatin. 

1.  What  was  the  cause  of  hatred? 

2.  I  do  not  know  what  cause  of  hatred  there  was. 

3.  I  do  not  know  whether  there  was  a  cause  of  hatred. 

4.  How"  do  these  matters  stand? 

5 .  How  these  matters  stand,  I  dare  not*  relate,  even*  in  a  letter. 

6.  Fearing  to  inquire  which  [of  the  two]  was "  Porsena,  he 
kills  the  secretary  instead-of  the  king. 

7.  1  do  not  see  what  can  be  more  suited  to  a  good  man 
than  to  stand  aside  from  civil  disputes. 

8.  I  am  uncertain  whether  I  am  more  pushed  by  the  sword 
or  by  famine. 

9.  Often  it  is  asked,  not  whether  a  thing  is  [true]  or  not, 
but  of-what-sort  it  is. 

10.  It  is  asked  earnestly  whether  it  was  done  or  not. 

11.  Did  the  Picene  land  follow  the  mad-counsels  of-the- 
tribunes,''  or  the  authority  of  the  consuls  ? 

12.  Did  [then]  conscience,  as  (id  quod)  is  wont  to  happen, 
make  you  timid  and  suspicious  ? 

13.  Doubt  now,  judges,  if  you  can,  by  whom  Sextus  Roscius 
was  killed ;  by  him  who,  on  account  of  his  death,  lives  in  pov- 
erty and  in  [the  midst  of]  plots,  or  by  those  who  avoid  investi- 
gation, [and]  possess  [his]  property  {bona). 

Lesson   29. 

other  Forms  of  Substantive  Clause, 

I.    For  the  classification  of  Substantive  Clauses,  see 
§  329,  Note  (H.  540,  comparing  G.  507). 

a.  qnomodo.  —  b.  ne  .  .  .  quidcm.  —  c.  \  287.  e  (G.  511.  R.l ;  H.  495.  ii.h  — 
d.  trlbunlcius  :  \  190  (G.  360.  R.^  ;  H.  395.  N.  2). 


54  Latm  Composition. 

Besides  Infinitive  Clauses  (with  or  without  subject- 
accusative),  are  the  following  :  — 

A.  —  Subjunctive  Clauses  with  ut. 

Note.  —  These  differ  from  simple  dependent  clauses  of  Purpose 
or  Result  (see  Lesson  23)  in  being  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb. 
See  §§  331,  332  (G.  544. 'i.  ii.,  546,  555.  2,  3,  4,  557,  558,  559; 
H.  540.  iii.,  498,  501). 

2.  Subjunctive  Clauses  are  either  — 

a.  Clauses  of  Purpose,  with  ut  or  ne :  as, 
I  ask  you  to  come,   rogo  ut  venids. 

Here  the  clause  ut  venias  is  the  object  of  rogo.     Negatively,  it 
v/ould  be 

I  ask  you  not  to  come,  rogo  ne  venids. 

Remark.  —  Notice  the  special  use  of  ut  and  ne  with  verbs  of 
Fearing:  §  33i./(G.  552^;  H.   498.  iii.  n.  i).     Thus  — 

1  fear  he  will  come,  vereor  ne  veniat, 
I  fear  he  will  not  come,  vereor  ut  veniat, 

b.  Clauses  of  Result,  with  ut  or  ut  non  :  as, 
I  cause  you  to  come,   efflcio  ut  venids. 

It  happened  that  you  had  not  come,  evenit  ut  non  ve- 
nisses* 

Note.  —  It  is  not  obvious,  at  first  sight,  that  this  last  sentence 
difters  in  kind  from  He  said  that  you  had  not  co/7te,  which  requires 
the  Accusative  and  Infinitive  of  indirect  discourse.  The  student 
will  do  well  to  study  carefully  and  compare  the  lists  of  verbs  or 
verbal  phrases  given  at  the  foot  of  pages  239,  241,  242  of  the  Gram- 
mar (A.  &  G.).  For  the  Sequence  of  Tenses  in  these  and  other 
dependent  constructions,  see  Lesson  20. 

B.  —  Indicative  Clauses  with  quod. 

3.  The  Indicative  Clause  with  qtwd  is  used  — 

a.  When  a  statement  of  fact  is  made  for  explanation  or  specifica- 
tion: §  2)2)Zi  with  a  (G.  525.  with  r.'-^;    H.  540.  iv.).     Thus  — 


Other  Forms  of  Substantive  Clause.  55 

It  is  unlucky  that  he  returned,  quod  rediit  Infaustum 

est. 
As  to  your  saying  this  (i.e.,  as  to  the  fact  that  you  said  it),  &c., 

quod  hoc  dlxlstl, 

b.  When  the  clause  is  the  object  of  a  verb  of  Feeling:  §  333.  b 
(G.  542  and  533  ;    H.  535.  iii.  n.).     Thus  — 

I  am  glad  that  you  have  come,  gaudeo  quod  venistu 

Note.  —  Here  the  accusative  and  infinitive  may  also  be  used : 
as,  gaudeo  te  venisse. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  I  cause  the  Romans  to  fight  {=  that  the  Romans  fight). 
—  2.  I  will  cause  the  Romans  to  fight.  —  3.  I  caused  the 
Romans  to  fight.  —  4.  I  have  caused  the  Romans  to  fight. — 
5.  I  had  caused  the  Romans  to  fight.  —  6.  We  will  brmg  [it] 
to  pass  that  he  depart.  —  7.  He  grieves  because  you  are  not 
well.  —  8.  I  wished  to  come.  —  9.  They  cried  out  that  they  were 
ready.'' —  10.  They  cried  out  that  he  should  lead  them  against 
the  enemy .^ —  11.    I  entreated  him  to  spare  me. 

Translate   into  ILatin. 

1.  They  caused  the   departure  to  seem    {caused  that  the 
departure  seemed)  just-like  a  flight. 

2.  I  wish/  fathers,  to  cross  the  Tiber,  and  enter  the  camp 
of  the  enemy. 

3.  What  more  befits  a  good  and  peaceful  man,  and  a  good 
citizen,  than  '^  to  stand  aside  ^  ft-om  civil  disputes  ? 

4.  I  for-my-part  will  not  make-the-mistake -^  of  giving  {that 
I  give  to)  you  some  ground  of  refusing. 

5.  The  senate  decreed^  that  the  consuls  should  inquire 
into  ^  this  affair. 

6.  I  am  glad  that  I  have  interrupted  you. 

a.  Statement  of  a  fact.  —  b.  Something  to  be  done.  —  c.  ^  331.  b  (G.  532. 
K..''^;  H.  533.  i.).  —  d.  \J  332.  b  (H.  502,  2).  —  e.  Either  infinitive  or  ///  with  the 
subjunctive. — f.  §  332.  e. — ^.  §  332.  /i  (G.  546;  H.  498.  i.  N.).  —  /i.  de. 


56  Latin   Composition. 

7.  He  commands  the  Ubians  to  lead  away"  [their]  flocks, 
and  convey  all  their*  [possessions]  from  the  fields  into  the 
towns. 

8.  He  promises  to  write  to  me. 

Lesson  30. 

Impersonal  Verbs. 

Impersonal  Verbs  may  be  divided,  in  respect  to 
their  construction,  into  two  principal  classes  :  — 

a.  Those  purely  impersonal,  which  have  no  subject  at  all.  These 
are  — 

1,  Those  which  express  operations  of  nature:  as,  grandinat,  it 
hails ;  pluit,  it  rains. 

2.  The  passive  of  intransitive  verbs  :  as, 

There  is  sinning,  peccdtur ; 
Fighting  was  going  on,  pugndhdtur ; 
There  is  need  of  striving,  nltendum  est. 

Remark. — When  an  impersonal  verb  of  this  class  is  put  into 
the  construction  of  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  it  remains  with 
no  subject :  as. 

It  snows,  ningit ;  I  see  that  it  is  snowing,  video  ningere. 
We  must  fight,  pugnandum  est ;  It  is  clear  that  we  must 
fight,  constat  pugnandum  esse, 

b.  Those  which  have  a  substantive  clause  as  subject:  viz.,  either 
an  infinitive  clause,  a  subjunctive  clause,  or  the  clause  with  quod. 

I .  Those  which  have  a  simple  infinitive  as  subject  are  generally 
followed  by  the  dative  :  as, 

I  like  to  joke,  libet  mihi  jocdrl. 

To  this  class  belong  licet,  it  is  pe7'i?iitted ]  libet,  it  is  pleasing; 
placet,  //  is  thoiight  best ;  necesse  est,  it  is  necessary ;  and  certum 
est,  //  is  determined. 

a.   §  331.  a  (H.  498.  i. ;  G.  546).  —  ^.  §  197.  d  (H.  441 ;   G.  195.  2). 


Impersonal  Verbs.  57 

2.  Oportet,  //  behooves;  constat,  it  is  well  agreed',  and  occa- 
sionally those  given  above  (libet,  etc.),  take  the  accusative  with  the 
infinitive :  as, 

It  was  necessary  that  there  should  be  some  head,  esse  ali^ 
quod  caput  oportebat. 

Here  esse  .  .  .  caput  is  subject  of  oportebat. 

3.  Those  v^hich  have  a  subjunctive  clause  as  subject  (see  Lesson 
26) .  To  this  class  belong  accidit  and  contingit,  it  happens ;  se- 
quitur,  it  follows ;  restat  and  reliquum  est,  it  remains ;  fit,  // 
happens  ;  f uturum  est,  //  is  going  to  happen ;  mos  est,  it  is  custom- 
ary;  &c. 

4.  Those  which  take  the  clause  with  quod  (see  Lesson  29). 

c.  The  passive  of  verbs  of  Saying,  &c.,  may  be  used  either  per- 
sonally or  impersonally. 

Thus,  we  may  say  either  Crassus  dicitur  abesse,  Crassns  is 
said  to  be  absent,  or  (less  commonly)  dicitur  Crassum  abesse,  it  is 
said  that  Crassiis  is  absent,  where  Crassum  abesse  is  subject  of 
dicitur:  §  330.  a,  b  (G.  528 ;   H.  534.  i.  with  i). 

Note.  —  With  impersonal  verbs,  the  word  it  is  used  in  English, 
but  is  not  to  be  rendered  into  Latin.  For  special  constructions,  see 
§§  221.  b,  c,  222,  227.  e,  nyj.  e  (G.  376,  381,  382.  2 ;  H.  409.  iii.  n., 
408.  I  and  2). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  You  may  (it  is  permitted  to  you  to)  set  out.  —  2.  May  I 
go  with  you?  —  3.  He  might  have  done  this  (it  was  permitted 
to  him  to  do  this).  —  4.  It  will  please  us  to  call-upon  you. — 
5.  Caesar  ought  (it  behooves  Caesar)  to  be  angry.  —  6.  I  ought 
not  to  have  been  angry.  —  7.  It  does  not  become  you  to  he.  — 
8.  It  is  raining.  —  9.  You  see  that  it  is  raining. —  10.  It  is 
well  agreed  that  Romulus  founded  Rome.  —  11.  It  happened 
that  Caesar  was  present.  —  12.  I  (dat.)  am  determined  to  ad- 
vance.—  13.  The  consul  thought  best  (it  pleased  the  consul) 
to  convene  the  senate.  —  14.  You  have  leave  (it  is  permitted) 
to  depart. —  15.  It  follows  that  you  have  leave  to  depart. — 
16.  We  ought  to  rejoice.  —  17.  He  said  that  I  ought  not  to 
delay.  —  18.    It  was  said  that  Caesar  had  been  defeated. 


58  Latin  Composition, 

Translate  into  !Latin. 

1.  It  was  necessary"  for  me  to  set  out  for  the  province  with 
military-power. 

2.  It  happened,  contrary  to  my  will  and  beyond  [my]  ex- 
pectation, that  it  was  necessary  for  me  to  go  into  the  province 
with  military-power. 

3.  It  has  rained  stones  (abl.)  on  the  Alban  Mount. 

4.  It  was  announced  to  king  and  senate  *  that  it  had  rained 
stones  on  the  Alban  Mount. 

5.  It  is  proper  to  write-out  one  speech  out  of  so  many. 

6.  I  have  judged  it  proper  (that  it  is  proper)  to  write  out 
one  speech  out  of  so  many. 

7.  Which-of-the-two  killed  Sextus  Roscius  ? 

8.  It  remains,  that  we  are  in  doubt  [as  to]  this,  which  of 
the  two  killed  Sextus  Roscius. 

9.  People  run  (there-is-running)  from  all  parts''  of  the  city 
into  the  forum. 

10.  He  said  that  it  had  never  pleased  him  **  that  Avaricum 
was  defended. 

11.  It  follows  that  you  do  not  know  how  these  matters  stand. 

12.  It  is  enough  not  to  be  a  liar.^ 

II.  —  Miscellaneous    Constructions. 
Lesson  31. 

Modifications  of  the  Predicate. 

I.  An  adjective  agreeing  with  a  substantive  clause 
must  be  in  the  neuter  gender :  as, 

It  is  clear  to  all  that  there  are  gods,  est  omnibus  per- 

spicuufu  cleos  esse. 
Here,  perspicuum  agrees  with  the  clause  deos  esse,  with  which 
it  is  connected  by  est. 

a.  nccesse.  —  b.  f  aires. — c.  locus.  —  d.  The  reflexive  pronoun,  as  relating  to 
the  subject  oisaid;  dative  after p/acet  —  <?.  This  should  properly  be  an  accusative 
"With  the  infinitive,  aliquem  esse,  etc.,  that  one  is  not,  &c. ;  but  allquem  is  omitted. 


Modifications  of  the  Predicate.  5g 

2.  A  subject,  whether  a  noun  or  mfinitive  clause, 
may  be  connected  by  the  copula  with  a  limiting  geni- 
tive :  §  214.  ^  and  d  (G.  365  ;  H.  401  and  403).    Thus  — 

The  army  is  of  (belongs  to)  the  consul,   consulls  est  exer- 

citiis* 
It  is  for  the  consul  to  defend  the  city,  consulis  est  de- 

fendere  urbem. 

a.  A  genitive  used  in  this  way  often  stands  instead  of  a  predicate 
adjective  in  agreement  with  a  phrase  or  clause.     Thus  — 

It  is  wise  to  look  before  you  leap,  sapientis  (not  sapiens) 
I  est  priusquam  inriiat  prospicere, 

b.  A  genitive  of  this  class  is  a  subjective  (or  possessive)  genitive, 
denoting  the  source  of  the  action  described.  In  the  case  of  personal 
pronouns,  the  genitive  cannot  be  used  in-  this  way,  because  their 
genitives,  mei,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  and  vestri,  are  only  objective. 
Hence, 

It  is  for  me  (you,  us)  to  defend  the  city,  tneum  (tuurrif 
suunif  nostrum,  not  mel,  etc.)  est  defendere  urhem, 

3.  With  impersonal  verbs  which  govern  the  dative, 
an  adjective  with  esse  will  be  either  in  the  accusative, 
or,  by  attraction,  in  the  dative  :  §  272.  a  (G.  535,  2  ; 
H.  536.  2,  2),  3)). 

I  am  at  liberty  to  take  my  ease,  licet  mihi  esse  otioso 
(or  otiosum) ;  but, 

I  ought  not  to  take  my  ease,  non  oportet  me  esse  oti- 
osum;  or,  non  deheo  esse  otiosus. 

Note.  —  With  licet  the  dative  is  the  usual  construction;  with 
other  impersonal  verbs  the  accusative  is  preferred. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  To  err  is  human.  —  2.  It  is  easy  to  do  this.  —  3.  Is  it 
not  shameful  to  lie? — 4.  It  is  wise  (for  a  wise  man)  to  despise 
empty  honors.  —  5.  It  shows  wisdom  to  reject  folly.  —  6.  It  is 
not  for  you  to  say  this.  —  7.   It  is  shameful  for  him  to  do  so.  — 


6o  Latifi  Composition. 

8.  It  is  [the  duty]  of  the  consuls  to  defend  the  city.  —  9.  It  is 
our  [privilege]  to  die  for  (^pro)  [our]  country. —  10.  You  have 
leave  to  be  neutral. —  11.  They  ought  to  be  ready.  —  12.  The 
consuls  think  it  best  to  be  watchful.  —  13.  They  had  made  up 
their  minds  {certu?n  erat)  to  be  faithful.  —  14.  It  becomes  you 
to  be  modest. —  16.    It  was  rash  to  advance  so  hastily. 

i^tp  rudens      p  rogredio  r^  tetnere 

Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  It  is  a  serious  [thing]  to  be  accused  with-truth. 

2.  He  thought  it  dangerous  to  enter  within  the  guard. 

3.  It  is  a  Roman  [virtue]  both  to  do  and  to  suffer  bravely. 

4.  It  is  wicked  to  deceive  by  falsehood ;  it  is  shameful  to 
change  [one's]  opinion. 

5.  It  is  uncertain  what  will  chance. 

6.  It  was  your  [privilege]  to  have  served  in  that  war. 

7.  To  manage  [one's]  business  ill  is  [worthy]  of  a  madman. 

8.  It  seems  to  you  a  royal  [act]  to  despise  all  lusts,  to 
think  {senfire)  freely  in  the  senate. 

9.  It  is  for  me  [who  am]  poor  to  count  [my]  flock. 

10.  In  so  great  perils,  it  is  for  you,  Marcus  Cato,  to  see  what 
is  going  on. 

11.  Is  it  for  an  orator  to  wish  to  excite  laughter  ? 

12.  We  ask  whether  it  is  for  an  orator  to  wish  to  excite  laughter. 

13.  This  very  [thing]  is  [the  mark]  of  a  great  {sum?mis) 
orator,  to  seem  a  great  orator  (ace.)  to  the  people. 

14.  It  was  more  glorious  to  contend  with  him  than  not  to  have 
[any]  adversary  at  all. 

Lesson  32. 

Use  of  Tenses, 

The  relations  of  Time  are  expressed  with  more  pre- 
cision by  the  tenses  employed  in  Latin  than  by  the  cor- 
responding English  usage.     In  particular  — 

a.  When  the  action  of  a  subordinate  clause  is  yet  to  come,  the 
Future  must  be  used  in  Latin,  where  English  admits  the  Present :  as, 

We  shall  be  healed  if  we  wish,  sdndhimur  si  volemus. 


Use  of  Tenses.  6 1 

b.  When  the  action  of  the  subordinate  clause  is  complete  in  re- 
lation to  the  principal  clause,  the  tenses  of  completed  action  are  used 
in  Latin  where  English  prefers  the  indefinite:  as, 

It  shall  be  done  if  you  deserve  (shall  have  earned  it),  si  eris 
meritus,  fiet» 

Translate  into  L.atin. 

1.  This  you,  Brutus,  will  know  at  once  (jam)  when  you 
come  into  Gaul. 

2.  He  will  both  judge  what  each  needs,  and  will  be  able  to 
speak  in  whatever  manner  the  cause  ciemands. 

3.  He  will  be  eloquent,  who  is  able  to  adapt  his  discourse 
to  (that),  whatever  is  becoming. 

4.  Whatever  mischief,''  crime,  slaughter  there  shall  be,  this 
ought  to  belong  (propriiis  esse)  to  the^  Roscii. 

5.  If  you  listen  to  me,  you  will  avoid  enmities,  and  consult 
for  the  ease  of  posterity. 

6.  I  shall  accomplish  this  more  easily  if  you  come  to  me  in 
(into)  Cilicia ;  and  I  think  it  concerns  both  me  and  the  repub- 
lic, and  especially  you. 

7.  [Your]  vices  shall  follow  you  whithersoever  you  go. 

8.  I  truly  will  follow  the  old  road,  but  if  I  find  a  nearer  and 
more  level  one,  this  I  will  repair. 

9.  [As  much]  care  as  you  bestow  upon  your  health,  so 
highly  I  shall  judge  that  I  am  valued  by  you. 

10.  As  quickly  as  I  can,*  and  by  as  frequent  letters,  I  will 
make^  the  whole  plan  of  my  days  and  journeys  known  to  you. 

11.  The  earth  never  refuses  [our]  rule,  and  never  returns 
without  usury  what  it  receives. 

Fable. 

A  fox  by  chance  had  seen  a  tragic  mask  :  "  Oh  how  great  a 
show,"  said  he,  "  has  no  brain  !  " 

This  is  said  for  those  to  wiiom  fortune  has  granted  honor  and 
glory,  [but]  has  taken  away  [from  them]  common  sense. 

a.  Partitive  genitive.  —  b.  quam  celerrinie  potero,  —  c.  efficere  ut. 


62  Latijt  Composition, 

Lesson  33. 

Wishes  and  Commands. 

The  following  cases  of  the  Subjunctive  and  Impera- 
tive require  to  be  carefully  observed  :  — 

1.  The  hortatory  and  optative  uses  of  the  subjunctive  in  Wishes  : 
§§  266,  267  (G.  253-257;  H.  483,  484.  i.  ii.  with  i,  2,  3,  4),  distin- 
guishing the  uses  of  the  primary  and  secondary  tenses. 

2.  The  imperative  in  Commands:  §  269  (G.  259;  H.  487), 
noting  the  special  uses  of  the  Future :  §  269.  d,  e  (G.  262,  260.  R. ; 
H.  487.  2). 

3.  The  various  forms  of  Prohibition :  §  269.  a  (G.  264,  266  ; 
H.  488,  489). 

Remark.  —  In  Prohibitions,  ne  must  be  used  instead  of  non; 
but  nihil  may  be  used  for  ne  quid,  nuUus  for  ne  ullus,  etc. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Send  Marcus  to  me. —  2.  Attend  carefully. —  3.  Let  us 
go  with  him.  —  4.  Do  not  fear.  —  5.  Be  sure  you  do  not  do 
this.  —  6.  May  I  accomplish  your  designs  !  —  7.  Do  not  boast 
without  reason.  —  8.  Come  and  bring  your  brothers  with  you, 
and  be  sure  you  do  not  delay.  —  9.  Let  me  know  of  your  ar- 
rival. —  10.  Do  not  wonder  that  I  come  unwillingly.  —  11.  Do 
not  think  that  I  come  unwillingly.  — 12.  Be  assured  that  we 
shall  be  faithful. 

Translate  Into  !Latin. 

1.  Consider  this,  as-is- worthy  your  nature. 

2.  Even  if  you  have  not  [any  thing]  to  write  (which  you 
may  write,  subj.),  yet  write. 

3.  Do  not  say  that  I  am  obstinate. 

4.  Be  not  so  unjust. 

5 .  If  you  do  not  lie,  may  I  perish. 

6.  Let  the  forum  give  way  to  the  camp,  peace  to  war,  the 
pen  to  the  sword,  the  shade  to  the  sun. 

7.  Would  that  those  songs  were  extant. 


Use  of  Participles,  63 

8.  Do  not  suffer  me,  the  grandson  of  Masinissa,  to  seek*" 
aid  from  you  in  vain. 

9.  If  you  love  me,  if  you  wish  to  be  loved  by  me,  send 
letters  to  me. 

10.  Fear  no  army,  no  battle. 

11.  Pardon  nothing ;  grant  nothing  at  all  to  favor;  be  not 
moved  by  pity. 

12.  Do  not  think  that  there  has  been  any  thing  in  our  state 
more  excellent  than  these  two  [men]. 

13.  They  shall  not  take  nor  {n'eve)  give  a  bribe,  neither  (iieve) 
in  seeking,  nor  in  administering  power. 

14.  If  they  cannot  stand,  let  them  fall. 

15.  If  there  is  any  spirit  in  us,  let  us  avenge  the  death  of 
those  who  have  perished  most  unworthily,  and  kill  these  robbers. 

16.  May  your  judgment  and  [that]  of  the  Roman  people 
approve  my  desire,  and  the  hope  of  the  rest  of  [my]  life  ! 

Anecdote. 

Epaminondas,  the  Theban,  when  his  soldiers  were  saddened 
(abl.  abs.)  because^  the  wind  had  carried  away  (perf.  pass, 
part.)  from  his  spear  an  ornament  hanging  after-the-manner 
{more)  of  a  fillet,  [and]  driven  [it]  upon  the  tomb  of  a  certain 
Lacedaemonian,  said  :  "  Do  not  be  alarmed,  soldiers  ;  destruc- 
tion is  portended  to  the  Lacedaemonians ;  for  [their]  tombs  are 
adorned  with  offerings." 

Lesson  34. 

Use  of  Participle. 

I.  Participles  are  often  used  in  Latin  where  Eng- 
lish usage  prefers  a  subordinate  clause,  or  even  an 
independent  sentence. 

Seejexamples  under  §  292  (G.  667-67 2>'',   H.  549). 

a.  Accusative  with  infinitive.  —  b.  =  becctuse  the  wind  had  driven  an  orna- 
menl  [which  was]  carried  away. 


64  Lathi   Cornpositioit. 

2.  Respecting  the  time  of  participles,  the  following 
points  are  to  be  observed  :  — 

a.  Only  Deponent  verbs  have  the  perfect  active  participle.  With 
other  verbs,  this  relation  is  expressed  either  by  a  subordinate  clause 
(generally  with  cum  and  the  pluperfect  subjunctive),  or  by  the 
passive  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute  :  as, 

Having  learned  this  thing  tlirongh  [his]  scouts,  Tiac  re  per 
speculatores  cognita  (Cses.) ;  or,  cutn  hanc  rem 
cognovisset. 

b.  The  perfect  participle  of  a  few  deponents  is  often  used  where  we 
should  use  the  present4   §  290.  b  (G.  278.  r.  ;  H.  550.  n.  i).  Thus  — 

Fearing  an  ambnseade,  he  kept  his  army  in  camp,  Insldlds 
vefHtuSf  exercituin  castrls  continuit  (id.). 

c.  The  future  participle  is  often  used  to  express  intention  or 
purpose  :  as,  locuturus,  abotit  (or  intending)  to  speak. 

Oral  Exercises. 

N.B.  In  these  sentences  notice  carefully  the  relation  of  the  time 
of  the  participle  to  that  of  the  verb. 

I.   [While]  withdrawing  from  the  [line  of]  battle,  he  crossed 

cedo  irafiseo 

a  small  river. —  2.   The  consul  led  the  army  across  the  river 
in-order-to-help  Syracuse.  —  3.  Catching-sight-of  the  army  of  the 

conspicor  ^ 

enemy,  he  crossed  the  river  in-order-to  attack  it.  —  4.  Defeating 

aggredior^  vinco"^ 

the  enemy  with  great  slaughter,  he  set  out  with  three  legions. 

eludes 

—  5.   Encamping  on  the  bank  of  the  river,  he  waited-for  the 

exspecto  ^ 

rest-of  the   troops.  —  6.   Confessing   their   fault,  they  begged 

fateor-  culpa  peto^ 

indulgence.  —  7.  They  cast  themselves  at  Caesar's  feet,  confess- 

venia  projicio  (dat.) 

ing  their  fault. 

Translate  into  I.atin. 

1.  The  letters  which  had  been  given"  made  the  crime  manifest. 

2.  They  beg  that  they  be  not  deserted  by  the  rest,  now  that 
a  co7nnienceme7it  of  war  has  been  made? 

a.   which  had  been  given  =  having-be en-given,  —  b.  Ablative  absolute. 


Gerund,  Gerundive,  and  Supine.  65 

3.  They  announce  to  our  ambassadors  that  they  have  re- 
turned because  they  feared  "^  the  perfidy  of  the  Bituriges. 

4.  The  townsmen,  terrified,  seized^  those  by  whose  means  they 
thought  the  rabble  had  been  stirred  up,  and  led  them  to  Caesar. 

5.  He  sent  colonists  to  Signia  and  Circeii,  who  shoidd  be 
a  defence  (plur.)  to  the  city  by  land  and  sea. 

6.  It   was   announced    to    Lucius    Quinctius   Cincinnatus 
[while]  ploughing  that  he  had  been  made  dictator. 

7.  After  recovering  this  town,  he  trusted  that  he  would 
bring  the  state  of  the  Bituriges  again  into  his  power. 

8.  There  is  behind  me  a  long  line  of  those  who  seek "  the 
same  honor. 

9.  Are  you  going  to  take  upon  yourself  so  great  labor,  so 
great  hostilities  of  so  many  men  ? 

Anecdote. 

After ^  Publius  and  Gnseus  Scipio  had  been  overwhelmed  in 
Spain,  with  the  greater  part  of  their  army,  and  all  the  nations 
of  that  province  had  accepted  {sequor)  the  friendship  of  the 
Carthaginians,  since '^  no  one  of  our  generals  dared  to  proceed 
thither  to  correct  matters,^  Publius  Scipio,  then  in-^  his  twenty- 
fourth  year,  promised  to  go.  By  which  spirit-of-confidence, 
indeed,  he  gave  hope  of  safety  and  victory  to  the  Roman 
people. 

Lesson  35. 

Gerund,  Grerundive,  and  Supine. 

\_Compare  Lesson  i8.] 

I.  In  the  use  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  the  fol- 
lowing points  are  to  be  observed  :  — 

a.    In  transitive  verbs  the  gerundive  is  generally  used  instead  of 

a.  Of  the  three  verbs  that  mean  fear  {timeo,  metuo,  and  vereor) ,  vereor  alone, 
being  a  deponent, -has  a  perfect  active  participle  :  use,  therefore,  either  veritl  or 
the  clause  quod  thnereiit.  —  b.  The  participle,  agreeing  with  ^^j,  which  is  the 
object  oiled:  \  292.  Rem.,  2d  line  (G.  667.  R.i ;  H.  549).  —  ^.  i.e.,  of  (persons) 
seeking.  —  d.  Words  put  in  italics,  but  not  in  brackets,  illustrate  some  principle 
of  the  lesson.  —  e.  Accusative  of  gerundive,  with  ad. — f.  ag'ens. 


66  Latin  Composition, 

the  gerund,  except  in  the  genitive,  in  which  they  are  about  equally 
common ;  as, 

conservandae  patriae  (=  cdnservandi  patriam)  causa. 

But  — 
ad  conservandam  (not  conservanduin)  patriain, 

b.  In  changing  the  construction  of  tht,  gerund  to  that  of  the 
gerundive,  the  case  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  must  be  the  same ; 
but  the  gerundive  agrees,  while  the  gerund  governs:  §  296  (G.  428 ; 
H.  543,  544). 

c.  Although  the  gerundive  is  always  passive,  yet,  like  other  pass- 
ives, it  often  corresponds  to  an  active  construction  in  English :  as, 

We  shonld  exercise  the  memory  (literally,  the  memory  should 
be  exercised),  exercenda  est  memoria* 

The  soldiers  had  to  leap  down  from  the  ships,  mllitibus 
de  ndvihus  desilienduin  [erat]* 

In  this  last  sentence  the  gerundive  is  impersonal ;  i.e.,  desilitur, 
t/tere  is  a  leaping  down  =  somebody  leaps  down ;  desiliendum  erat, 
t/tere  was  a  necessity  of  leaping  down. 

d.  The  Agent,  with  the  genmdive,  is  regularly  expressed  by  the 
Dative:  §  232  (G.  353;  H.  388). 

2.  For  the  uses  of  the  Supine,  see  §§  302,  303  (G.  436, 
437  with  R.^ ;  H.  546,  547  with  i,  2). 

Oral   Exercises. 

I.  He  is  desirous  of  fighting.  —  2.  We  are  fond  of  sailing.  — 

cupidus  sUidiosus      navigo  '^ 

3.  While  writing.  —  4.   By  running,  —  5.  Of  entering  the  city. 

inter-  curro'^  ititro^ 

—  6.    Of  entering  the  fields.  —  7.  On  account  of  managing  this 

gero'^ 

affair.  —  8.   We  must  "fight.  —  9.   Caesar  must"  lead-forth  the 

Tes  ediico  ^ 

army. —  10.  The  censors  gave-a- contract  for  building^  a  tem- 

loco '  aedijico ' 

pie.  —  II.  They  sent  ambassadors  to  ask  [for]  peace.  —  12.   It 
is  difficult  to  say  who  is  the  bravest  of  us.  — 13.  The  com- 

fortis  itn- 

mander  was  obliged-to-follow"  through  the  fields. 

perator  sequor^ 

a.  Use  the  gerundive,  with  the  dative. —  b.  The  gerundive  agreeing  with 
templum.  , 


Gerund,  Gerundive^  and  Supine,  6y 

Translate  into  Latin. 

1 .  Plans  have  been  formed  in  this  state,  of  destroying  the  city^ 
slaughtering  the  citizenff,  [and]  extinguishing  the  Roman  name. 

2.  He  dedicated  places  for  performing  the  sacrifices,  which" 
the  pontifices  call  Argei. 

3.  We  must  contend  with^  luxury,  with  madness,  with  crime. 

4.  He  sends  his  Am  Aruns  with  part  of  the  forces  to*'  be- 
siege Aricia. 

5.  We  must  see  what  comes  into  dispute. 

6.  It  is  hard  to  teJ]  in  how  great  odium  we  are  with**  foreign 
nations. 

7.  It  seems  necessary-to-speak  (that  it  must  be  spoken) 
concerning  the  choice  of  a  commander  (concerning  choosing, 
&c.)  for  this  war. 

8.  The  memory  must  be  trained  by  learning  word-by-word 
as  many  writings  as  possible,*  both  our  [own]  and  foreign. 

9.  I  have  not  done  this  for  the  sake  of  exciting  you,  but  of 
testifying  my  love. 

10.  He  gave  four  legions  to  Labienus  to  lead  (to  be  led) 
among-^  the  Senones. 

1 1 .  First  I  seek  peace  and  indulgence  from  Jupiter,  best  [and] 
greatest,  and  the  other  immortal  gods  and  goddesses,  and  pray 
from  them  that  they  suffer  this  day  to  have  shone  upon  [us], 
both  to''  preserve  the  safety  of  this  [man],  and  to  establish  the 
common  welfare. 

Anecdote. 

While  Camillus  was  besieging  the  Faliscans,^  a  schoolmaster 
delivered  [to  him]  the  children  of  the  Faliscans,  whom  he  had 
led  forth  ^  outside  the  walls,  as  if  for  the  sake  of  walking,  saying 
that  the  state  would  necessarily  do  [what  was]  commanded,^ 
for  [the  purpose  of]  ^  getting  back  those  hostages.  Camillus 
not  only  spurned  the  treachery,  but  also  gave  over  to  the  boys 

^'  ^  199  (G.  616.  3,  ii. ;  H.  445.  4). —  b.  cum.  —  c,  a<a?  with  gerundive. — 
d.  apud.  —  e.  ^  93.  b  (G.  317;  H.  170.  2  (2)).  —  /  i7i  with  accusative. — 
g.  Dative  of  Camillus,  with  present  participle.  —  h.  "  having  been  led  forth." 
—  i,  the  things  commanded.  — j.   Dative  of  gerund. 


6S  Latin  Conipositio7t. 

their  master,  [with]  his  hands  bound  behind  his  back  (plur.),  to 
drive  him  (gerundive)  with  rods  to  their  parents,  [thus]  obtain- 
ing by  kindness  the  victory  which  he  had  not  desired  by  fraud ; 
for  the  FaUscans,  on  account  of  this  justice,  surrendered  to  him 
of  their  own  accord. 

Lesson  36. 

Use  of  Conjunctions, 

Note.  —  For  a  list  of  the  Conjunctions,  with  their  classification 
and  meaning,  see  §  155.  a.-h.  (G.  476,  485,  494,  500,  501 ;  H.  310, 
311)  ;  for  their  Syntax  or  special  use,  see  §§  156,  208,  with  a,  b,  c,  d 
(G.  477-484,  486-493,  495-499,  502-504;  H.  554,  555). 

In  the  use  of  Conjunctions  the  following  points  are 
to  be  observed  :  — 

a.  When  several  words  follow  one  another  in  the  same  construc- 
tion, the  conjunction  (et)  may  be  repeated  between  every  two 
i^polysyndetofi)  ^  or  may  be  wholly  omitted  {asyndeioit) .     Thus  — 

Marcus  Antonius  and  Quintus  Cassius,  tribunes  of  the  people, 
JW.  Antonius  Q,  Cassius  trihunl  plebis. 

Go  now  to  Philip,  Parmenio,  and  Attains,  I  nunc  ad  JPhi- 
lipiyuin  et  JPar^nenionem  et  Attalum, 

b.  Two  or  more  Adjectives  belonging  to  the  same  subject  are 
ordinarily  connected  by  et :  as, 

A  great  white  horse,  equus  "iudgnus  et  alhus. 

c.  When  a  relative  or  conjunction  precedes  such  a  series  of  words, 
it  is  commonly  repeated  with  each  word  {anaphora)  :  as, 

Because  they  had  harassed  the  J]dui,  the  Ambarri,  and  the 
AUobroges,  quod  Aeduos,  quod  Amban'os,  quod 
Allohroges  veocdssent. 

d.  When  a  negative  word  or  clause  is  to  be  connected  with  what 
goes  before,  it  is  common  to  join  the  negative  with  the  conjunction, 
not  with  the  word  or  clause  that  is  connected ;  so  that  neque  takes 
the  place  of  et  non,  and  even  of  sed  non :  as. 

Unwilling  and  not  innocent,  invltl  neque  innocentes. 


Conjunctions  ;    Apposition.  69 

ti   The  phrase  neque  enim  often  commences  a  sentence  :  as, 

For  no  one  but  traders  visits  tliese  without  good  reason, 
neque  enim  teineve  praeter  ntercdtores  illo  adit 
quisquam  (for  neiuo  eniin,  etc.). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Honor,  justice,  and  mercy  exhort  us.  —  2.  We  entreat 
you  to  spare  us,  our  wives  and  children.  —  3.  They  brought 
out  their  spears,  swords,  and  shields.  —  4.  His  countenance  was 
calm,  and  not  unfriendly.  —  5 .  We  are  ready,  but  not  impatient. 
—  6.  He  set  out  at  once,  and  did  not  delay« —  7.  We  receive 
you  gladly,  for  we  too  are  not  forgetful  of  your  many  great  kind- 
nesses.—  8.  Our  ancestors  carried  on  wars  with  Antiochus,  Philip, 
the  ^toHans,  and  the  Carthaginians.  —  9.  Cicero  was  a  tall 
lean"  [man],  (and)  of  feeble*  health  ;  but  a  fluent,''  witty,"^  and 
effective^  pleader.^  Epistle.      - 

Tullius  to  his  Terentia. 

If  you  are  in  good  health,  it  is  well :  I  am  in  good  health. 
We  have  as  yet  nothing  certain,  either  of  Caesar's  arrival,  or  of 
the  letters  which  Philotimus  is  said  to  have.  If  there  is  any 
thing  certain,  I  will  let  you  know.  Be  sure  {fac)  that  you  take 
care  of  your  health.     Farewell.     Aug.  1 1 . 

III.  —  Case-Constructions. 

Note.  —  The  more  usual  case-constructions  have  already  been 
given  in  Lessons  7-16.  Some  of  the  more  idiomatic  usages,  how- 
ever, are  here  introduced  for  further  illustration,  especially  with  a 
view  to  the  introduction  of  classical  examples.  F^or  remarks  on  the 
use  of  cases,  see  the  Note  on  page  145  of  the  Grammar  (A.  &  G.)  ; 
and  for  a  general  view  of  these  constructions,  the  Synopsis  on  p.  254. 

Lesson  37. 

Apposition. 

Simple  Apposition  is  often  employed  in  Latin  to 
express   relations  which  in   English  would   require  an 

a,  macer. —  b.  tenuis  (abl.).  —  c,  facundus.  —  d.  facetus.  —  e.  efficax.  — 
/   orator. 


70  Latin  Composition, 

adverbial  phrase,  or  even  a  separate  clause.      In  par- 
ticular, — 

a.  A  noun  in  apposition  is  often  used  to  express  the  time  of  an 
action,  or  some  attendant  circumstance  :  as, 

I  [when]  a  youth  lored  Quintns  Maximus,  an  old  man,  ego 

Q.  Maximum  seneni  adulescens  dllexl, 
Cato  learned  Greek  when  he  was  an  old  man,   Cato  senex 

litterds  Graecds  didiciU 
Caesar  came  to  the  aid  of  the  Oaiils  against  the  Germans, 
Caesar  Gallls  adjutor  venit  adversus  Germdnos* 
Cicero  was  banished  from  Home  in  Pompey's  second  consul- 
ship,  Bompeio  consule  iterum,  Cicero  Homd  pul- 
sus est. 
Note.  —  The   word   consule   is  here   in  predicate   agreement 
with  the  name  Pompeio  in  the  ablative  of  time  or  circumstance 
{locative  ablative) .     It  may  be  considered  a  case  of  Ablative  Abso- 
lute (understanding,  if  we  will,  a  participle  of  esse),  and  is  the 
common  way  of  expressing  dates  in  Latin. 

b.  This  form  of  apposition  {predicative)  must  be  carefully  distin- 
guished from  ordinary  {attributive)  apposition :  as  in  Cato  senex, 
the  aged  Cato ;  Caesar  adjutor,  CcBsar  the  helper.  For  special 
rules  of  agreement  see  §§  184.  ^,  b,  c;  185  (G.  319,  324.  R.^  334, 
with  R.^ ;  H.  362  and  373). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Caesar  entered  Gaul  as  a  conqueror.  —  2.  Zenobia  was 
victorious  over  the  Persians  (gen.).  —  3.  I  shall  be  created 
consul.  —  4.  The  boy  was  called  Milo.  —  5.  I  understand  that 
the  boy  was  called  Milo.  —  6.  Cicero,  when  consul,  suppressed 
the  conspiracy  of  Catiline.  —  7.  Cato  used  to  tell  in  his  old 
age.  —  8.  Fabius  in  his  second  consulship.  —  9.  The  consuls* 
Cicero  and  Antonius. 

Translate  into  L.atin. 

I.  Publius  Africanus  had  been  twice  consul,  and  had  de- 
stroyed the  two  terrors  of  this  empire,  Carthage  and  Numantia, 
when  he  accused  Lucius  Cotta. 

a.  The  titles  should  follow  the  names. 


Uses  of  the  Genitive.  ji 

2.  A  great  part  of  goodness  is  to  wish  to  become  good. 

3.  Hardly  any  one  {nemo  fere)  dances  [when]  sober,  unless 
by  chance  he  is  crazy. 

4.  History,  the  witness  of  times,  the  light  of  truth,  the  life  of 
memory,  the  mistress  of  life,  the  messenger  of  antiquity,  —  by 
what  voice  but  that  of  the  orator  (what  other  voice  unless  [that] 
of  the  orator)  is  [she]  commended  to  immortality  ? 

5.  He  was  at  Athens  [when]  a  youth;  he  had  turned  out  a 
perfect  Epicurean,  —  a  class  not  at  all  suited  to  speaking. 

6.  Marius  in  his  fourth  consulship  defeated  the  Cimbri  and 
Teutones  with  very-great  slaughter. 

Lesson  38. 

Uses  of  the  Genitive. 

The  following  are  special  or  idiomatic  uses  of  the 
Genitive  :  — 

1.  The  genitive  (or  ablative)  of  Quality,  with  adjectives:  §  215 
(G.  364;  H.  396.  v.). 

Note.  —  In  this  construction  the  genitive  must  be  used  to  ex- 
press measure  or  requirernent ;  the  ablative  to  express  bodily  peculi- 
arities:  §  251.  a  (G.  364.  R. ;  H.  419.  2).  Otherwise,  either  case 
may  be  used. 

2.  The  genitive  of  Definition,  equivalent  to  a  word  in  apposition  : 
§  214./ (G.  359;  H.  396.  vi.). 

3.  The  Partitive  genitive,  used  with  words  of  Quantity  :  §  216.  a, 
I,  2,  3,  4  (G.  371,  with  R.-^  and  4;  H.  397). 

4.  The  Objective  genitive,  as  representing  various  constructions 
in  English:  §§  217,  218.  a,b,d  (G.  361.  2,  ^-j-t^,  374,  356.  r.' ; 
H.  396.  iii.). 

Remark.  —  The  examples  under  the  sections  here  referred  to 
should  be  carefully  studied  and  explained. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Cicero  was  an  orator  of  great  eloquence.  —  2.  The  ass  is 
an  animal  with  long  ears.  —  3.    It  is  a  thing  requiring  (of)  the 


'J2        ^  Latin   Composition. 

greatest  care.  —  4.  The  Greeks  were  [men]  of  peculiar  subtilty." 

—  5.  A  wall  of  eighty-eight  feet.  —  6.  A  man  of  senatorial 
rank.  —  7-  A  journey  of  several  days.  —  8.  A  house  with  thick 
walls.  —  9.  We  seem  to  be  of  little  spirit.  — 10.  A  youth  of 
great  name.  —  11.  The  city  of  Padua.^ — 12.  Much  pleasure. 

—  13.  Enough  time.  —  14.  But-little''  bravery."^ — 15.  Not 
enough  soldiers. —  16.    Some  wisdom.  —  17.    Common  to  all. 

—  18.  Envy  of  Cicero. —  19.  Eager  for  glory.  —  20.  Skilled 
in  law.  —  21.    Hatred  of  us.^  —  22.   An  opportunity  for  jesting. 

—  23.    Hatred  towards  Nero.  —  24.   Which  of  you-''  will  come  ? 

—  25.    I  hear  praise  of  you  daily. 

Translate  into  Liatin. 

1.  King  Deiotarus,  a  man  of  marked  good-will  and  fidelity 
towards  the  Roman  people,  sent  ambassadors  to  me. 

2.  I  have  written  many  things  to  Curio,  a  most  genial  man, 
and  of  the  highest  [sense  of]  duty  and  refinement. 

3.  The  youth  turned  out  [to  be]  of  a  truly  royal  nature. 

4.  Your  letters  have^  the  greatest  weight  in  my  estimation 
{apud  me) .  -^ 

5.  He  did  not  refuse  the  surname  of  Brutus. 

6.  This  name  of  poet  is  sacred  in  your  eyes  {apud  vos), 
[you,  who  are]  most  cultivated  men. 

7.  They  asserted  that  the  Germans  were  of  immense  size  of 
body,  incredible  valor,  and  experience  in  arms. 

8.  In  my  affairs  there  is  absolutely  nothing  new. 

9.  I  had  a  night  full  of  fear  and  wretchedness. 

10.   This  whole  topic  seems  appropriate  to  philosophers. 
Ti.    I  will  entreat  you  to  impart'^  some  of  your  geniality  to 
me,  too,  and  to  Catulus. 

12.  Crassus,  with  (in)  the  greatest  affability,  had*  also  suffi- 
cient sternness. 

13.  Gorgias  judged  that  this  was  especially  peculiar  to  an 

a.  sollertia.  —  b.  Pataviiim. —  c.  parztm. —  d.  fortltudo.  —  e.  \  99.  c. — 
/  ^S  99.  b  (G.  99.  R.i;  H.  396.  iii.).— ^.  are  o/,eic.  —  h.  §  331.  a  (G.  546  and 
543.  2;   H.  498.  i.).  —  i.  Imperfect,  to  imply  a  permanent  possession. 


I  Genitive  after  Vei^bs.  73 

orator,  —  to  be  able  to  enhance  a  subject  by  praising  [it],  and 
again  ruin  [it]  by  disparaging. 

14.  I  have  less  strength  than  either  of  you  [two]. 

15.  Begin,  if  you  have  any  spirit. 

16.  No  aid  ought  {opo7^tet)  to  be  brought. 

17.  They  decided  that  no  assistance,  no  aid,  no  help,  ought 
to  be  brought  by  them  (themselves)  to  men  guilty  of  (bound 
by)  so  great  a  crime. 

Lesson  39. 

Crenitive  after  Yerbs. 

The  Genitive  is  used  as  the  object  of  the  following 
classes  of  verbs  :  — 

a.  Of  remembering,  forgetting,  and  reminding;  but  see  §  219, 
with  Rem.  (G.  375.  R.\  R.^;  H.  406.  ii. ;  407.  i,  2;  409.  i.). 

b.  Of  accusing,  condemning,  and  acquitting,  to  express  the 
charge,  and  sometimes  the  penalty:  §  220,  with  b  (G.  -^77.  R.^  r.'-*; 
H.  409.  ii.). 

c.  misereor,  miseresco,  pity;  also,  the  Impersonals  miseret, 
pity ;  piget,  disgust ;  paenitet,  repe;it ;  pudet,  s/iame ;  taedet  or 
pertaesum  est,  weary,  with  the  accusative  of  the  person  affected : 
§  221.  a  and  b  (G.  376;  H.  406.  i.  and  410.  iv.). 

d.  Interest  and  refert,  it  concerns,  —  the  subject  of  the  verb 
being  a  neuter  pronoun,  an  infinitive  clause,  or  the  subjunctive  with 
ut:  §  222  (G.  381  and  382.  2  ;  H.  406.  iii.  and  408.  2). 

Remark.  —  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pronoun,  the 
possessive  is  used  in  this  construction,  in  the  ablative  singular  femi- 
nine:  §  222.  a  (G.  381'^;  ?I.  408.  i.  2))  :  as, 

How  does  it  concern  you?  quid  id  refert  tud? 

Refert  is  rarely  used  in  any  other  way. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  I  am  ashamed  of  my  folly.  —  2.  They  were  tired  of  life. 
—  3.  Do  you  recollect  the  battle  of  Cannae"? — -4.  I  shall  not 
forget  that  man.  —  5.  It  concerns  me  that  you  are  well.^  —  6.  It 

a.  Camtensis.     Recollect  =  recorder,  —  b.  Accusative  with  infinitive. 


74  Latin  Composition. 

concerned  the  republic  to  remember  this.  —  7.  Who  accused 
Marcus  of  treason?  —  8.  He  did  not  remember  us.  —  9.  I  pity 
your  misfortunes.  —  10.    I  am  sorry  that  I  forgot  your  advice. 

—  II.  Whose  interest  is  it  that  this  crime  be  committed?  — 
12.  We  are  acquitted  of  [the  charge  of]  theft. —  13.  Don't 
you  remember"  that  I  reminded  you  of  that  service  ? —  14.  It  is 
none  of  your  business  what  I  said  to  your  brother. 

Translate  into  L-atin. 

1.  Publius  Sestius,  praetor  elect,  was  convicted  of  bribery. 

2.  These  benefits  you  have  from  me,  whom  you  falsely- 
charge  with  treason. 

3.  It  concerns  each  province  ^  to  subdue  Amanus. 

4.  Already  before,  I  had  made-up-my-mind  that  it  seriously 
concerned  each  province  to  subdue  Amanus. 

5.  I  am  tired  of  the  business. 

6.  It  is  incredible  how  tired  of  the  business  I  am. 

7.  I,  although  I  am  dissatisfied  with  myself,  am  yet  chiefly 
joined  in"  comparison  with  him. 

8.  The  Athenian  state "^  is   said  to  have  been  very  wise* 
while  it  possessed  power. -^ 

9.  Men  pitied  not  more^  the  punishment  than  the  crime. 

10.  It  greatly  concerns  both  of  us  [two],  that  I  see  you. 

11.  From  that  oration  he  is  reminded  of  your  crime  and 
cruelty. 

Lesson  40. 

Dative  with  Yerbs. 

The  following  classes  of  verbs  are  followed  by  the 
Dative  of  indirect  object  in  Latin,  though  most  of  them 
are  transitive  in  English  :  — 

1.  Verbs  signifying  \o  favor,  help,  &c.  :  §  227  (G.  345  ;  H.  385)  ; 

2.  Compounds  of  ad,  ante,  con,  etc. :  §  228  (G.  346;  H.  ^^Z^)  ; 

3.  A  few  compounds,  whose  meaning  would  seem  to  require  the 
ablative:  §  229  (G.  344.  r.^;  H.  386.  2). 

a.  meminisfmc. —  b.  Of  two.  —  c.  Use  the  preposition.  —  ^.  Of  the  Athenians. 

—  e.  Superlative. — f.  pot'irl  rerum. — g.  The  adverb  inagis. 


Dative  with    Verbs.  75 

Remark.  —  Neuter  verbs  which  govern  the  dative  are  used  in  the 
passive  iinpersonally  with  the  dative ;  §  230  (G.  208 ;  H.  301.  i). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I  I.  I  do  not  envy  you.  —  2.  You  are  not  envied  by  me. — 
3.  He  spared  no  one.  —  4.  I  cannot  beheve  Cato.  —  5.  We 
will  not  be  angry  with  the  legion.  —  6.  This  was-advantageous 
to  the  state.  —  7.  Who  can  resist  Caesar?  —  8.  Can  Caesar  be 
resisted?"  (no).  —  9.  The  Romans  favored  Masinissa. —  10.  He 
had  snatched  away  power  from  you.  —  11.  The  woman  cursed^ 
him.  —  12.   Those  men  must  be  pardoned." 

Translate  into  L-atin. 

1.  He  chiefly  gives-attention  to  the  cavalry. 

2.  Most-of  the  youth,  but  especially  [those]  of  the  nobles, 
were  favorable  to  Catiline's  schemes. 

3.  We,  the  Roman  youth,  declare  this  war  against  you. 

4.  I  desire  to  satisfy °  this  [man]. 

5.  Thaf^  military  glory  must  be  preferred  to  your  formulas 
and  processes. 

6.  You  will,  doubtless,  place  this  king  above  all  the  kings 
with  whom  the  Roman  people  have  carried  on  war. 

7.  They  placed  this  consolation^  before  themselves. 

8.  You  will  pardon  my  haste,  and  the  shortness  of  [my] 
letter. 

9.  That  [degree]  of  burden  is  placed  upon  us  by  the  de- 
sires of  these  youths. 

lo.-  Acts-of- injustice  began  to  be  committed -^  by  the  chiefs 
upon  the  commonalty,  who,  until  this  day,  had  been  courted 
with  the  greatest  eagerness. 

11.  Tell  me,  Marcus  Pinarius,  if  I  speak^  against  you,  are 
you  going-to-abuse  me,  as  you  have  done  to  the  others?  As 
you  sow,^  so  shall  you  reap,  said  he. 

12.  Both  the  condition  of  the  accuser  and  the  power  of  the 
unfriendly  shall  be  respected?^ 

a.  Impersonal.— -  i5.  \  227.  ^.,  second  line.  —  c.  \  227.  c.\  satisfaccre.  —  d.  ille. 
—  e.  Genitive. — /  \  143.  a  (G.  424.  R.i ;  H.  297.  i). — g.  Future  perfect. — 
h.  Impersonal. 


"J 6  Latin  Composition. 

13.  What  heavier  punishment  can  happen  to  a  man  than 
that  his  letters  should  not  be  believed  ?  " 

14.  Violence  deprives  ^  young- men  (dat.)  [of]  life. 

15.  This  boy  has  just  snatched  away  a  jackknife  from  [his] 
brother. 

16.  A  band  of  robbers  plundered''  this  poor  man  of  all  [his] 
money. 

Lesson  41, 

Dative  with  Passives. 

In  general,  verbs  which  govern  the  Dative  can  be 
used  only  impersonally  in  the  Passive.  The  following 
points,  however,  require  to  be  noticed  :  — 

a.  The  passive  is  used  personally  when  the  verb  also  takes  an 
accusative :  as, 

Hostages  are  demanded  of  all  the  .states,    oinnibus  clvi- 

tdtibus  obsides  itriperantur  (Active,  omnibus  clvitatibus 
obsid'es  imperat). 

b.  Certain  verbs  govern  either  the  dative  or  the  accusative,  and 
so  may  be  used  either  personally  or  impersonally  in  the  passive : 
§  227.  b,  c  (G.  347;  H.  385.  3).     Thus  — 

,     He  consults  me,  consuUt  me;  I  am  consulted,  consular. 
He  consults  for  me  (for  my  interests),  cofisulit  mihi ;   my 
interests  are  consulted,  consulitur  ^inihu 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  We  do  not  fear  Catihne.  —  2.  We  fear  for  the  city:  — 
3.  He  consulted  Caius.  —  4.  He  consulted  for  [the  interests 
of]  Caesar.  —  5.  We  take  counsel  against  Cato.  —  6.  I  believe 
you.  —  7.  I  trust  this  boy  to  you.  —  8.  Can  you  control  the 
tempests?  —  9.  I  guard-against  you.  —  10.  I  am-cautious  for 
you.  —  II.  Who  compares  Caesar  with  \_or  to]  Pompey  ?  — 
12.  He  commanded  us  [to  do]  this.  —  13.  Did  you  threaten 
him  with  death  P*^ — 14.  I  do  not  envy  you  your  fortune. — 
15.  We  foresaw  danger.  —  16.  We  provided  for  your  safety. — 
17.   The  Samnites  are  persuaded  of  this. 

a.   Impersonal,  —  b.  aufero.  —  c.  adinio?  —  d.  "  death  to  him." 


Dative  with  Passives.  TJ 

Translate  into  Liatin. 

1.  He  Qommands  the  cavalry  to  strike"*  as  great  terror  as 
possible  ^  into  the  enemy. 

2.  They  entreat  [him]  to  consult  his  own  fortunes. 

3.  He  could  not  persuade  any  state  of  the  Germans. 

4.  Nor,  nevertheless,  could  any  state  of  the  Germans  be 
persuaded  to  cross  the  Rhine." 

5.  If  my  authority  has  any  {quid)  weight  with  {apud)  you^ 
I  earnestly  exhort  and  advise  you  to  consult  for  [the  interests 
of]  these  provinces. 

6.  The  interests  of  these  provinces  were  consulted. 

7.  He  compares  his  [own  old  age]  to  the  old  age  of  a 
spirited  and  victorious  horse. 

8.  This  one  [thing]  I  do  not  know,  whether  to  congratulate 
you  or  fear  [for  you] . 

9.  It  seems  to  you  a  kingly  [thing]  so  to  live  that  you  not 
only  serve''  no  man  {7iemo),  but  not  even  any  passion;  to  de- 
spise all  lusts ;  to  want  not  gold,  nor  {non)  silver,  nor  other 
possessions  {res)  ;  to  think  freely  in  the  senate,  to  consult 
rather  [for]  the  advantage  of  the  people,  than  [its]  desires ;  to 
yield  to  no  one,  to  resist  many.  If  you  think  this  to  be  kingly, 
I  confess  that  I  am  a  king. 

10.  Did  not  this  Magnus  [of]  outs,  who  made  [his]  fortune 
equal  to  [_or  with]  his  virtue,  present  Theophanes  the  Mity- 
lensean  with  the  citizenship,  in  an  assembly  of  the  soldiers  ? 

11.  Caesar  commanded  those  states  which  had  joined  his 
friendship  [to  furnish]  cattle. 

12.  Do  you  think  that  the  glory  of  that  victory  is  shared "^  by 
you  (dat.)  with  Marcus  Crassus  or  Cneius  {Gnaeics)  Pompey? 

Epistle. 

King  Alexander  to  Darius. 
Darius,  whose   name  you  have  taken,  laid  waste  with   all 
[kinds  of]  destruction  the  Greeks,  who  occupy  the  coast  of 
the  Hellespont,  and  the  Ionian  colonies  of  the  Greeks.     Then 

a.  /-// with  subjunctive.  —  b.  ^/m;/z  with  superlative.  —  c.  Present  subjunctive. 

—  d.  I'.M-fect. 


yS  Latin  Composition. 

with  a  great  army  he  crossed  the  sea,  carrying  war  (abl.  abs.) 
upon  Macedonia  and  Greece.  Again,  Xerxes,  of  the  same  race, 
came  to  attack *"  us  with  troops  of  savage  barbarians ;  who,  de- 
feated in  a  naval  battle,  yet  left  Mardonius  in  Greece,  that  even 
{quoqiie)  in-his-absence  he  might  lay  waste  cities,  and  burn 
fields.  But  who  is  ignorant  that  my  father  Philip  was  slain  by 
those  whom  your  [followers]  had  tempted  by  the  hope  of  a 
great  sum-of-money  ?  Therefore,  I  repel,  not  excite,  war. 
Nevertheless,  if  you  come  *  [as]  a  suppliant,  I  promise  that  you 
shall  receive,  without  price,  both  your  mother  and  your  wife  and 
[your]  children.  I  know  [how]  both  to  conquer  and  to  con- 
sider the  conquered. 

Lesson  4.2. 

Special  Uses  of  the  Dative. 

The  following  uses  of  the  Dative  are  more  or  less 
idiomatic  :  — 

a.  The  dative  of  Service  answers  to  a  variety  of  constructions  in 
English:  see  examples,  with  Note,  under  §  233  (G.  350;   H.  390). 

d.  The  dative  with  esse  is  the  usual  form  to  denote  simple  Pos- 
session ;  which  is  to  be  distinguished  from  the  use  of  the  genitive  or 
possessive  with  esse,  and  from  that  of  habeo,  which  means  rather 
to  hold  ox  keep:  §  231.  Rem.  (G.  349.  R.'^). 

c.  The  dative  of  Agency  is  regularly  used  with  the  gerundive 
expressing  obligation^  and  sometimes  with  other  passives,  especially 
the  perfect  participle.  But  with  the  gerundive  (used  impersonally) 
of  a  verb  governing  the  dative,  the  ablative  with  a  or  ab  is  used 
instead  of  a  second  dative.     Thus  — 

A  boy  should  obey  Ms  mother,  inatrl  a  fllio  x>cirendum 
est. 

Note.  —  The  dative  of  the  person  who  sees  or  thinks  is  regularly 
used  after  the  passive  of  video  (usually  to  be  rendered  seejn)  :  as, 

It  seems  (or,  seems  good)  to  me,  mihi  videtur. 

a.  Gerundive.  —  b.  Future  perfect. 


special  Uses  of  the  Dative.  79 

Oral  Exercises. 

T.  This  must  be  done  by  Caesar.  —  2.  We  must  go  with 
him.  —  3.  I  have  a  father.  —  4.  Cato  had  much  judgment. — 
5.  It  was  a  source  ^pleasure.  —  6.  Eloquence  is  a  dehght  to 
me.  —  7.  They  sent  troops  as  aid.  —  8.  Hannibal  must  set 
out.""  —  9.  His  plea  was  a  great  assistance  to  us.  —  10.  Caesar 
had  many  legions.  —  11.  What  has  happened  to  Caius  ?  — 
12.  What  do  you  wish  [for  yourself]? — 13.  The  Gauls  had 
a  magistrate  whose  name  was  Vergobret.^  — 14.  It  seemed  to 
Hannibal  that  the  war  must  be  carried  over  into  Italy.  — 
15.  The  Roman  Senate  was  at  length  persuaded  by  Cato  that 
Carthage  must  be  destroyed. 

Translate  into  !Latin. 

1 .  I  have  with  Murena  a  great  and  long-established  friendship. 

2.  Innocence  has  more  peril  than  [it  has]  honor. 

3.  Tiberius  Sempronius,  whose  surname  was  Longus/  fights 
successfully  with  Hanno. 

4.  Wealth  began  to  be  [esteemed]  an  honor;  and  glory, 
dominion,  and  power  followed  (sing.)  it. 

5.  The  greediness  (plur.)  of  certain  men  was  a  hindrance 
to  me. 

6.  To  that  brave  (superl.)  man,  his  father,  he  was  a  great  aid 
in  perils,  solace  in  labors,  [source  of]  congratulation  in  victory. 

7.  The  Bituriges  fall  at  the  feet  ^the  Gauls. 

8.  I  grieve  that''  I  am  suspected  of  negligence  by  you. 

9.  I  was  a  [cause  of]  safety  to  him. 

10.  I  have  always  thought  that  you  ought  not  only  to  be  pro- 
tected by  me,  but  also  honored  and  distinguished. 

11.  Two  brothers,  whose  name  was  Philaenus.^ 

12.  How  did  it  come  into  your  mind  to  answer  thus? 

13.  Now,  now,  says  Catulus,  I  understand,  Crassus,  what  you 
say ;  and  by  Hercules  I  assent.  I  see  that  you,  a  man  very 
keen  to  learn,*^  have  had  enough  time  for  ascertaining  those 
things  which  you  say. 

a.  Impersonal.  —  b.  Attracted  into  the  case  of  the  relative.  —  c.  Accusative 
wilh  infinitive,  or  quod  clause.  —  d.  ad  with  accusative  of  gerund. 


So  Latin  Cofnposition. 

14.  If  the  splendor  of  the  games  is  a  pleasure  to  the  people, 
it  is  not  to  be  wondered  at  that"*  it  profited  Lucius  Murena  with 
the  people. 

Lesson  43. 

Special  Uses  of  the  Accusative. 

The  use  of  the  Passive  of  verbs  which  govern  two 
accusatives  requires  to  be  noticed. 

a.  If  one  of  the  two  accusatives  is  a  predicate,  as  after  verbs  of 
naming,  etc.,  both  become  nominative. 

b.  When  one  of  the  accusatives  is  a  secondary  object,  as  after 
verbs  oi  teaching,  &c.,  it  remains  in  the  accusative.     Thus  — 

I  was  taking  lessons  in  music  from  the  master,  musicen 

ci  iriCigistvo  docebciV  (Active,  magistcr  musicen  me  docebat). 

c.  The  accusative  of  the  thing  also  remains  after  the  passive  of 
rogo ;  but  with  other  verbs  of  asking  the  accusative  of  the  Thing 
becomes  subject-nominative,  while  the  name  of  the  Person  is  put  in 
the  ablative  with  a  preposition.     Thus  — 

Cato  was  asked  [his]  opinion,    Cato  sententiam  rogdtus 

est.    But  — 
The  Eomans  were  asked  for  peace,  pdoc  d  Moindnls  pete- 

hdtur. 

Note.  —  For  other  idiomatic  uses  of  the  Accusative,  see  Lessons 

8  and  14. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Virtue  is  laughed-at  by  fools.  —  2.  He  grieves*  [at]  his'' 
fate.  —  3.  We  grieve  [at]  his''  fate.  —  4.  I  asked  Cato  his 
opinion.  —  5.  Cato  was  asked  his  opinion.  —  6.  We  are  taught 
the  rules  of  virtue.  —  7-  O  the  cares  of  men  !  —  8.  He  grieved 
much.  —  9.  Somewhat  angry. —  10.  Did  he  conceal^  his  criaiLS 
from  you? — 11.  He  taught  us  music.  — 12.  Who  asked  you 
your  name? —  13.  I  asked  you  what  your  name  was. — 
14.    Cicero -was  saluted  by  the  Senate  [as]  the  father  of  [his] 


a.  Accusative  with  infinitive,  or  ^^^^^  clause. —  3.  Used  here  transitively.— 
c.  Use  suus.  —  d.  The  genitive  of  is.  —  e.  c'elo  always  takes  the  accusative  of  the 
person,  but  may  take  the  ablative  of  the  thing  with  d'e. 


special  Uses  of  the  Ablative,  8i 

country.  —  15.   Aid  was  earnestly  besought  of  Caesar  by  the 
^duans  against  the  Germans. 

Translate  into  L.atin. 

1.  I  request  this  [of]  you,  that  you  come-to-the-relief-of 
this  anxiety  of-mine. 

2.  He  asks  them  to  come  thence  with  him  to  Turnus. 

3.  The  army  is  panic-stricken-at"  this  act. 

4.  I  have  received  letters  from  you  two  or  three  times  at- 
most,  and  those  very  short. 

5.  I  am  distressed  that  it  is  at  all^  pleasant  to  you  without 
me. 

6.  O  deceitful  hope  and  frail  fortune  of  men,  and  empty 
contentions  of-ours  ! 

7.  You  ask  of  me  why  I  fear  Catiline. 

8.  O  excellent  commander,  no  longer  {nee  Jam)  to  be  com- 
pared with  [that]  brave  (superl.)  man,  Manius  AquiHus,  but,  in 
truth,  with  the  Paulluses,  Scipios,  Mariuses  ! 

9.  The  shout  which  is  raised  behind  the  back  of  (dat.) 
those  fighting  has  much  effect  in  {ad)  terrifying  our  men. 

Fable. 

A  stag  asked  a  sheep  for  a  peck  of  wheat,  taking  a  wolf  as 
surety.''  But  she,  dreading  trickery  [said]  :  "The  wolf  is  always 
accustomed  to  snatch-up  and  go-off;  you  [are  accustomed]  to 
flee  out  of  sight  with  swift  course.  Where  shall  I  look  for  you, 
when  the  day  arrives?'"' 

Lesson  44. 

Special  Uses  of  the  Ablative. 

[^Compare  Lessons  lO,  b ;   13.  a,  e\. 

The  following  are  special  or  idiomatic  uses  of  the 
Ablative  :  — 

I.   Of  Comparison :  §  247,  with  <3:  (G.  399  ;  H.  4 17,  with  i  and  2). 

<2.  Used  here  transitively. —  b.  quicquam.  —  c.  Ablative  absolute.  —  d.  Future 
perfect. 


82  Latin  Composition. 

Note.  —  Observe  the  special  use  of  plus,  amplius,  minus,  with- 
out quam:  §  247.  c  (G.  311.  R.'*;  H.  417.  N.  2);  also  the  use  of 
two  comparatives  with  quam  to  compare  two  qualities  of  an  object : 
§  192,  with  a  (G.  314;  H.  444.  2). 

2.  Of  Degree  of  Difference  :  §  250  (G.  400;  H.  423). 

3.  Of  Birth  or  Origin:  §  244.  a  (G.  395  ;  H.  415.  ii.). 

4.  Of  Price  :  §  252  (G.  404  ;  H.  422)  ;  compare  Genitive  of  Value  : 
§  252.  a,  b  (G.  379,  380;  H.  404,  405). 

5.  Of  Need,  with  opus  and  usus :  §  243.  e  (G.  390 ;  H.  414.  iv.). 

6.  With  dignus,  etc. :  §  245.  a  (G.  373.  R.^;  H.  421.  iii.). 

7.  With  utor,  etc. :  §  249  (G.  405  ;  H.  421.  i.). 

Remark.  —  Notice  especially  the  use  of  opus  and  Gsus  with  the 
perfect  participle:  as,  cauto  opus  est,  there  is  need  of  caution. 
Also  of  opus  (indeclinable)  as  predicate  :  as, 

We  require  a  guide,  dux  nobis  opus  est, 

N.  B.  The  topics  of  this  Lesson,  with  the  accompanying  Exer- 
cises, may  be  divided  according  to  the  convenience  of  the  teacher. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Bolder  than  a  lion.  —  2.  Three  miles  nearer.  —  3.  More 
prudent  than  brave.  —  4.  Less  than  twenty  ships.  —  5.  With 
more  than  two  hundred  soldiers.  —  6.  Dearer  to  me  than  to  you. 

—  7.  Much  smaller.  —  8.  You  abuse  our  patience.  —  9.  lam 
not  worthy  of  your  friendship.  —  10.  He  eats  pears. —  11.  Caesar 
needs  troops.  — 12.  There  was  need  of  haste.  — 13.  We  will  en- 
joy these  pleasures.  — 14.  He  employed  diligence. — 15.  There 
w^as  need  of  setting  out  at-once.  —  16.  What  do  I  need?"  — 
17.  The  son  of  ^neas.  —  18.  Freed  from  odium.  — 19.  Valued 
at  a  high  rate. —  20.  At  how  much  did  you  buy  [it]?  — 
21.  It  is  worth  (stands)  two  thousand  sesterces.  —  22.  I  do  not 
value  (make)  you  a  tuft-of-wool.  —  23.    Not  far  from  the  river. 

—  24.  Descended  from  the  Germans.  —  25.  A  good-for-noth- 
ing beast.  —  26.  I  bought  the  horses  for  a  hundred  sesterces 
apiece. —  27.  I  sold  the  horses  dear  (at  a  great  price). — 
28.    I  sold  them  for  more  than  I  bought  them  [at]. 

a.   See  Remark,  above. 


special  Uses  of  the  Ablative.  83 

Translate  into  L.atin. 

1 .  Cato  is  dearer  to  me  than  Caesar  [is] . 

2.  Cato  is  dearer  to  me  than  [to]  Caesar. 

3.  None  (by  nothing)  the  less  he  sought  the  consulship  for 
{ill)  the  next  year. 

4.  In  one  day,  more  than  twenty  cities  of  the  Bituriges  are 
set-on-fire. 

5 .  Be  assured  {scito)  that  nothing  is  more  agreeable  to  me 
than  your  Dolabella  [is]. 

6.  This  mischief  is  spread  more  widely  than  is  supposed 
(opmione) . 

7.  You  prefer  glory  to  {qiiam)  wisdom. 

8.  I  understand  that  Domitius  had  rather  seem  cruel  in 
punishing  than  remiss  in  passing  over  [crimes] . 

9.  It  is  a  more  serious  thing  to  be, stripped  of  fortunes  than 
not  to  be  advanced  in  dignity. 

10.  I  understand  that  your  favor  is  highly  valued. 

1 1 .  That  is  the  man  who  has  driven  us  exiles "  from  [our] 
country. 

12.  He  abdicated  the  consulship,  and  withdrew  from  the 
state. 

13.  I  lack  all  enjoyment  and  all  letters. 

14.  Servius  Tullius  was  son  of  a  [female]  slave. 

15.  The  Samnites  are  said  to  be  sprung  from  the  Sabines. 

16.  He  preferred  that  all  his  possessions*  [should]  be  sold, 
and  that  he  should  be  stripped  of  his  splendid  (superl.)  patri- 
mony, [rather]  than  that  any  delay  should  be  caused  to  any  one 
{qiiisqiiani)  of  his  creditors. 

17.  The  barbarians,  catching-sight-of'  the  standards  at  a  dis- 
tance, desist  from  the  siege. 

18.  He  interdicted  them  (dat.)  from  fire  and  water. 

19.  Approach  Otho,  as  you  write  :  finish  up  that  matter. 

20.  I  have  at  length  read  the  letters,  worthy  of  Appius  Clau- 
dius, full  of  elegance,  courtesy,  [and]  earnestness. 

a.  Apposition.  —  b.  Accusative  with  infinitive.  —  c.  Perfect  participle ;  as  this 
;':  -t  precedes  that  of  the  principal  verb. 


84  Latin  Composition. 

21.  Caesar  gets-possession-of  a"  great  number  of  cattle  and 
men. 

2  2.  Now  there  is  need  that  you  be  well  in  mind,  in  order 
that  you  may  {possufu)  in  body. 

23.  What  need  have  I  of  your  friendship,  if  you  do  not  do 
what  I  ask? 

24.  One  of  the  nearest  performed  the  same  duty;  a  third 
succeeded  to  the  second,  and  a  fourth  to  the  third. 

25.  No  expression  was  heard  from  them  unworthy  the  majesty 
of  the  Roman  people. 

26.  They,  relying  upon  the  strength  {praesidiu77t)  of  the 
place,  take  refuge  in  the  woods  (ace.)  and  marshes. 

27.  There  is  need  of  daily  practice,  and  from  things  the 
attention  must  be  transferred  to  words. 

28.  I  hope  that  that  order  will  consider  me,  as-is-due  {pro) 
my  labors  in  behalf  of  the  republic,  not  unworthy  of  honor,  espe- 
cially [that  already]  enjoyed. 

Anecdote. 

Titus  Labienus,  lieutenant  of  Caius  Caesar,  desiring  to  fight 
against  the  Gauls  before  the  arrival  of  the  Germans,  who  (ace.) 
he  knew  would  come  to  aid"  them,  pretended  want-of-confi- 
dence,  and,  placing  his  camp  (abl.  abs.)  on  the  other  bank, 
proclaimed  a  departure  for  {in)  the  next  day.  The  Gauls,  be- 
lieving that  he  was  flying,  began  to  cross  the  river,  which  was 
between  {ineditis)  ;  [and]  Labienus,  leading  his  army  round, 
cut  them  to  pieces  in-the-midst-of  the  very  difficulties  of  crossing 
the  river. 

Epistle. 

A  letter  was  brought  to  me  from  my  brother  Quintus,  [to- 
gether] with  the  decree-of-the-Senate  which  was  passed  in-re- 
gard-to  me.  I  have  it  in  mind  to  wait- for  the  proposal  of  the 
laws,  and  if  there  shall-be-opposition,  I  will  follow  the  advice  of 
the  Senate,  and  rather  lose  my  life  than  my  country.  Do  you, 
I  beg,  hasten  to  come  to  us. 

a.  Dative  of  service. 


Relations  of  Time,  85 

Lesson  45. 

Relations  of  Time. 

I.  The  more  common  relations  of  Time  are  ex- 
pressed by   Cases  as  follows  :  — 

1.  Accusative  oi duration :  §  256  (G.  337;  H.  379)  ; 

2.  Ablative  of  time  at  or  within  which:  id.  (G.  392  ;  H.  429). 

a.  Distance  of  time  is  expressed  by  ante  and  post,  used  either  as 
prepositions  governing  the  Accusative,  or  as  adverbs  with  the  Abla- 
tive, and  with  either  cardinal  or  ordinal  numerals :  as, 

Ten  days  from  now,  post  decern  dies. 
Ten  days  afterwards,  decern  post  diebus. 
The  tenth  day  afterwards,  deciind  post  die, 

b.  These  may  be  followed  by  quam,  with  a  clause  describing  the 
event  before  or  after  which  anything  is  :  as, 

Ten  days  before  he  came,    ante  decern  dies  (decimuTn 
dieirif  decern  dlebus  ante)  quam  venit, 

c.  Also  abhinc,  ago,  may  be  used  with  either  case  :  as, 
Ten  days  ago,   abhinc  decent  dies,  or  dlebus, 

2.  In  the  recording  of  Dates  in  the  Roman  manner, 
observe  — 

1.  The  divisions  of  the  Month  by  Kalends,  Nones,  and  Ides": 
§  376,  with  the  introductory  Note  (G.  App. ;  H.  642.  ii.)  ; 

2.  The  rule  for  reckoning  by  these  divisions :  id.  d  (G.  App. ; 
H.  642.  iii.). 

a.  The  number  of  the  day  is  expressed  by  an  ordinal  numeral ; 
the  name  of  the  month  takes  the  form  of  an  adjective.  Thus  the 
date  will  appear,  if  written  out  in  full  — 

April  19,  die  tertio  decinio  ante  kalendds  3Idids, 

This  is  more  commonly  abridged,  thus  : 

tertio  dechno  [ante']  kalendds  3Idids  ;  or,  with  numeral 
letters,  XIII.  kal.  (a.  d.  XIII.  kal.)  3Idi. 

a.  The  nouns  Kalendae^  Nonae,  IdHs,  are  all  feminine  plural. 


86  Latin  Composition. 

b.  Often  ante  diem  (a.  d.),  with,  an  ordinal,  is  used  like  a  prepo- 
sition governing  an  accusative  :  as, 

This  day  was  the  fifth  day  before  the  kalends  of  April  (March 
28),  is  dies  erat  a*  d,  F.  hal,  Apr, 

c.  This  phrase  may  even  be  governed  by  a  preposition  :  as. 

To  the  fifth  day  before  the'  kalends  of  November  (October  28), 
in  a,  d.  F.  kalendds  Nove^nhres  (Novemhrls), 

d.  The  date  of  the  Roman  year  is  ordinarily  expressed  by  the 
names  of  the  Consuls  in  the  ablative  without  a  conjunction  (compare 
Note,  Lesson  27)- 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Within  two  years. —  2.  In  the  eighth  month.  —  3.  Five 
months  ago.  — 4.   Seven  years  before. —  5.  For  eighteen  days. 

—  6.  During  more  than  six  days. —  7.  He  died  three  years 
ago.  —  8.   Twelve  years  after.  —  9.    I  stood  for  several  hours. 

—  10.  Three  days  before  Caesar  fought  with  the  Gauls.  — 
II.  Twelve  years  after  Cato  died.  —  12.  The  day  before  the 
Kalends  of  January  (Dec.  31).  —  13.  About  the  5th  of  De- 
cember.—  14.    September  4. — 15.    March  23. —  16.   May  15. 

—  17.  June  15. —  18.  September  5.  —  19.  October  5. — 
20.    May  31. —  21.    May  30. 

Translate  into  L.atin. 

1.  I,  the  ally  and  friend  of  the  Rornan  people,  am  held  be- 
sieged now  the  fifth  month. 

2.  Although  the  period  (times)  of  Homer  is  uncertain,  yet 
he  was  many  years  before  Romulus. 

3.  Cato  departed  from  hfe  eighty-five  years  old  (natus). 

4.  Here  the  praetor  of  the  Roman  people,  the  guardian  and 
defender  of  the  province,  lived  now  for  successive  summer  days. 

5.  After  a  few  days  the  Senate  was  freed  from  the  danger 
of  massacre. 

6.  He  died  the  year  before  my  censorship,'*  ten  years  after 
my  consulship. 

a.   ante  me  censorem. 


Relations  of  Place.  8y 

Lesson  46. 

Relations  of  Place. 

\_Compare  Lesson  17.] 

In  general,  the  relations  of  Place  are  expressed  by- 
Prepositions.  The  following,  however,  require  to  be 
separately  noticed  :  — 

1.  The  Accusative  of  Extent:  §  257  (G.  335  ;  H.  379)  ; 

2.  The  Genitive  of  Measure :  §  215.  /^  (G.  364.  r.  ;  H.  396.  v.)  ; 

3.  The  Ablative  of  the  way  by  which :  §  258.  ^  (G.  387)  ; 

4.  The  special  constructions,  not  requiring  a  preposition,  and 
used  chiefly  with  the  names  of  Towns  :  viz., 

a.  The  Ablative  of  the  place  fro?7i  which:  §  258.  a  (G.  411; 
H.  428.  ii.)  ; 

b.  The  Accusative  of  the  place  to  which :  §  id.  b  (G.  410 ; 
H.  428.  i.)  ; 

c.  The  Locative  form  of  the  place  in  which:  §  id.  c^  d  (G.  412, 
witli  R.^ ;  H.  428.  iii.)  ; 

d.  The  Ablative  in  special  locative  phrases :  id.  /(G.  385,  386; 
H.  425-  3)- 

Remark.  —  Prepositions  must  be  used  to  denote  7ieighborhood :  as, 

Towards  (not  into)  or  near  Tarentum,  ad  Tarentuin. 

For  certain  idiomatic  uses  of  Prepositions  as  indicating  place  or 
direction,  —  especially  ab,  ex,  in^  —  see  §  260.  a,  b. 

Epistle. 

Ttdlius  to  his  Tiro. 

We  departed  from  you,  as  you  know,  on  the  second  of  No- 
vember. We  came  to  Leucas  on  the  sixth  of  November,  on  the 
seventh  to  Actium ;  there  we  tarried  the  eighth  on  account  of 
the  weather.  Thence  on  the  ninth  we  sailed  in-fine-style  to 
Corcyra.      We  were  at  Corcyra  until  the    isth,""  delayed  by 

a.  Notice  that  when  this  letter  was  written,  B.C.  52,  November  had  only 
twenty-nine  days :  the  thirtieth  was  added  in  Caesar's  reform  of  the  Calendar, 
B.C.  45. 


88  Latm  Composition. 

storms.  On  the  i6th,  we  proceeded  a  hundred  and  twenty  fur- 
longs into  the  harbor  of  the  Corcyraeans,  to  [the  neighborhood 
of]  Cassiope.  There  we  were  kept  by  the  winds  until  the  2 2d. 
On  that  day,  we  set  sail  after  dinner  (having  dined).  Thence, 
with  a  very  gentle  south-wind,  and  a  clear  sky,  we  came  in-high- 
spirits  on  that  night  and  the  day  after  to  [the  neighborhood  of] 
Hydrus,  in  Italy;  with  the  same  wind  the  next  day — that  was 
Nov.  24  —  at  the  fourth  hour,  we  came  to  Brundisium ;  and  at 
the  same  time  with  us  Terentia,  who  values  you  very  highly, 
entered  the  town.  ...  I  have  left  a  horse  and  mule  for  you  at 
Brundisium.  It  remains  that  I  ask  and  beseech  this  of  you,  that 
you  do  not  {ne)  sail  rashly. 

IV.  —  Adjectives  and  Pronouns. 

Lesson  47. 

Adjectives:  Special  Uses. 

The  points   chiefly  requiring  notice  in  the  use  of 
Adjectives  are  the  following:-- 

1.  The  rules  for  Gender:  §  187,  with  a,  b,  c  (G.  282;  H.  439. 
i»2,  3). 

2.  The  use  by  Synesis :  id.  d  (G.  202.  r.^  ;  H.  438.  6). 

3.  Adjectives  (especially  in  the  plural)  used  as  Nouns :   §  188 
(G.  195.  R.*;  H.441). 

4.  Neuter  adjectives,  singular  or  plural,  including  their  use  as 
abstracts:  §   189.  a,  b,  c  (G.  195.  R.'^  202.  R.^;  H.  id.  with  i,  2; 

438.4). 

5.  Certain  superlatives  —  as  summus  —  with  medius,  etc.  :  §  193 
(G.  287.  R. ;  H.  440.  N.2)  in  agreement,  as  designating  a  part. 

6.  The  reciprocal  use  of  alius  and  alter:  §  203  (G.  306 ;  H.  459, 
with  i). 

7.  The  adjective  with  adverbial  force:   §   191  (G.  324.  r.^;  H. 
443)- 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.   Psetus  and  Arria  are  both  dead.  —  2.   Virtue  and  honor 
are  to  be  desired.  —  3.   Folly  is  an  evil  [thing].  —  4.    In  the 


Adjectives  :   Special  Uses.  89 

first  part  of  the  way.  —  5.  I  came  unwillingly.  —  6.  I  was  the 
first  to  come  (I  the  first  came) .  —  7.  One  helps  one,  another 
another.  —  8.  The  nearest  part  of  the  province.  —  9.  In  the 
middle  of  the  assembly. —  10.  With  the  rest  of  the  soldiers. — 
II.  The  love  of  truth.  —  12.  He  reports  the  truth  (true  things). 
—  13.  I  read  the  letter  unwillingly.  —  14.  He  is  the  most  ready 
to  follow  ( =  he  follows  most  ready) .  —  15.  In  the  late  [part  of 
the]  night.  — 16.  The  greatest  part  of  the  boys  have  gone-off 
to  play  (sup.).  —  17.  I  see  a  great  crowd  of  roughs*  howling 
in  the  square.^ 

Translate  into  Liatin. 

1.  A  little  before  midnight/  going  forth  from  the  town  in 
silence,  they  began  to  cross  the  river. 

2.  This  is  the  third  letter  (this  third  letter)  I  have  written 
to  you  on  the  same  day. 

3.  I  encamped  in  the  farthest  [part  of]  Cappadocia,  not 
far  from  the  Taurus. 

4.  They  look  round  one  upon  another. 

5.  Treaties  are  made,  one  under  one  condition,  another 
under  another. 

6.  Messala  when  censor  was  the  first '^  who  made  a  theatre 
at  Rome. 

7.  They  assemble  in  crowds  at  daybreak. 

8.  Some  of  you  are  geese,  which  only  scream,  [but]  cannot 
harm ;  others  dogs,  which  can  both  bark  and  bite. 

9.  It  shows ^  a  great  soul  to  despise  greatness  (great  things), 
and  to  prefer  mediocrity  to  {qtiam)  excess. 

10.  Some  were  sent  among  the  Volscians,  otliers  to  Cumae, 
to  collect  corn. 

11.  I  commanded  the  lieutenant  to  lead  these  five  cohorts  to 
the  rest  of  the  army. 

12.  If  you  go  unwillingly,  why  do  you  go? 

13.  Avarice  impels  some,  anger  and  rashness  others. 

14.  I  love  the  truth;  I  wish  [to  have]  the  truth  told  me  :  I 
hate  a  liar. 

a.  turbulentus.  —  b.  platea.  —  c.  media  nox.  —  d.  primus,  agreeing  with  the 
subject. —  e.  =  if  is  o/,  &c. 


90  Latin   Composition, 

Lesson  48. 

Derivatives :    Possessives. 

Derivative  Adjectives  are  generally  to  be  preferred 
to  the  possessive  genitive,  and,  in  many  cases,  to  the 
locative  construction  :  §  '190  (G.  360.  r.^  ;  H.  395.  n.  2). 
Thus  — 

Another  man's  house,  aliena  doimis. 
The  fight  at  Cannse,  pugna  Camiensis* 

This  use  is  especially  to  be  remarked  in  the  following 
cases :  — 

a.  The  Personal  Pronouns  have  no  possessive  genitive :  hence 
the  adjectives  meus,  etc.,  are  the  only  possessive  form. 

b.  As  the  Possessive  is  equivalent  to  a  genitive,  it  may  have  a 
genitive  in  apposition,  or  a  relative  in  agreement  (by  syttesis)  :  as, 

The  country  of  us  all,  nostra  omnium  patvia, 
Tlie  glory  of  you  who  have  done  this,   vestra  qui  haec 
fecistis  gloria. 

Remark.  —  As  there  is  no  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person 
in  Latin,  the  forms  /ii's,  /i/m,  /ler,  their,  thejn  must  be  expressed  by 
the  oblique  cases  of  the  Demonstratives  is,  ille,  iste,  hie. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  They  pushed  back  our  [men].  —  2.  Csesar  exhorts  his 
[troops].  —  3.  The  war  of  Cassias.  —  4.  A  rebellion  of  slaves. 
—  5.  The  affairs  of  the  city.  —  6.  On  a  mound  of  earth. — 
7.  Under  the  race  of  Hector.  —  8.  Great  courage  and  judg- 
ment.—  9.  The  army  is  not  yours,  but  Caesar's. —  10.  The 
good  all  favor  me,  and  the  wicked  envy  me.  — 11.  He  called 
out  as  many  soldiers  as  possible.  —  12.  Your  life  and  character 
are  known  to  all.  —  13.  Labor  is  not  an  evil.  —  14.  This  is  not 
your  shield,  but  his.  —  15.  He  says  this  is  not  your  shield,  but 
his.  —  16.  This  was  my  work  alone  (of  me  alone).  —  17.  Our 
labors,  who  are  here  present.  —  18.  He  was  the  friend  of  you 
(tuus^,  who  nevertheless  destroyed  him. 


Pronouns :  Reflexive  and  Intensive,  91 

Dialogue. 

Grumio.,  Go  out  doors  out  of  the  kitchen,  [you]  scoundrel, 
[you]  who  show-off  your  wit  to  me  among  [my]  stew-pans. 
Go  forth,  [our]  master's  ruin,  out  of  the  house.  I,  by  Pollux, 
will  punish  you  well  in  the  country,  if  I  live  (fut.).  Go  out,  I 
say  !     Why  do  you  skulk  ? 

Tranio.  What  the  mischief  is  your  (dat.)  shouting  here  in 
front  of  the  house?  Do  you  think  you  are  in  the  country?  Be 
off  from  the  house  !  Go  away  into  the  country.  Go  away  and 
be  hanged  to  you.  Be  off  from  the  door  !  —  Well !  [is]  this 
[what]  you  wanted  ? 

Gr.    I  am  done  for  !     Why  do  you  beat  me  ? 

Tr.  Because  you  will  [it].  What  the  mischief  is  your  busi- 
ness with  me,  or  what  I  am  doing  ? 

Lesson  49. 

Pronouns:    Reflexive  and  Intensive. 

Ambiguity  often  arises,  in  English,  from  the  double 
meaning  of  self,  as  reflexive  (se)  or  as  intensive  (ipse). 
These  are  to  be  carefully  distinguished  in  Latin.    Thus, 

Cato  liilled  himself  (reflexive),   Cato  se  occldit. 

I  saw  Cato  himself  (intensive),  ipsum  Catonem  vldl. 

N.B.  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  are 
also  reflexive :  as, 

I  greatly  blame  myself,  vehementer  me  culpa, 

a.  When  both  are  used,  the  emphatic  ipse  generally  agrees  with 
the  subject  of  the  verb,  not  with  the  object:  as, 

I  myself  (I  too,  or  it  is  I  that)  reproach  myself,  ipse  me 
culpa. 

b.  To  express  own  (emphatic),  the  genitive  of  ipse  is  used  in 
apposition  with  the  genitive  implied  in  the  possessive :  as, 

You  have  betrayed  your  own  country,  vestrani  ipsarum 
patriarn  pradidistis. 


92  Latin  Composition. 

c.  The  possessive  suus  is  itself  emphatic,  and  is  made  more  so 
by  being  put  before  the  noun.     Thus  — 

He  slandered  [his]  friend,  aiuico  tnaledixit  {am'icd  sub  would 

be  emphatic,  and  sub  a?nicbj  "  his  own  friend,"  still  more  emphatic). 

Remark.  —  The  special  emphatic  use  of  idem  should  be  com- 
pared with  that  of  ipse,  and  the  several  significations  of  the  latter 
should  be  carefully  observed :  §  195./-/  (G.  297,  298  ;  H.  452.  1-5). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  With  Caesar  himself.  —  2.  He  thinks  with  himself. — 
3.  Even  the  veterans  fled.  —  4.  He  hates  himself.  —  5.  The 
very  walls  tremble.  —  6.  Even  into  the  formn.  —  7.  Our  own 
pursuits.  —  8.  He  despises  his  own  [possessions].  —  9.  In  say- 
ing this  he  (Jdem)  denies  that  he  is  a  Roman.  —  10.  You  have 
great  confidence  in  yourself  (/?/ J). —  11.  Devotion  {studiuni) 
to  us.  — 12.    Even  to  me,  his  friend,  he  seems  a  liar. 

Translate  into  L.atin. 

1.  You  even  gave  yourself  into  custody. 

2.  I  am  like  myself,  and  they  are  like  themselves. 

3.  I  desire  nothing  more  than  that  I  be  like  myself,  and 
they  [like]  themselves." 

4.  He  himself  spoke  in  his  own  behalf,  and  Caius  Cotta 
[spoke]  briefly,*  because  he  was  [his]  sister's  son. 

5.  First  give  thanks  to  the  immortal  gods,  then  to  your  own 
valor. 

6.  Not  even  they  themselves  compare  themselves  with  them 
in  valor. 

7.  The  town  Alesia  itself  was  on  the  top  of  the  hill. 

8.  No  one  sees  the  pirate-captain  himself,  upon  whom  pun- 
ishment ought  to  have  been  inflicted. 

9.  They  themselves  have  come-to-their-senses  through  ad- 
miration of  my  resolution. 

10.  They  remember  all  the  things  which  they  care  for,  —  who 
owe  them,  whom  they  themselves  owe. 

a.  Either  accusative  with  infinitive,  or  ut  with  subjunctive.  —  b.  Few-things. 


Relative  Pjvnouns.  93 

Anecdote. 

[When]  Chabrias  the  Athenian  [was]  about  to  fight  with  the 
fleet,  —  as  a  thunderbolt  struck  {exctcssus) "  in  front  of  his  own 
ship,  [and]  the  soldiers  were  "^  scared  by  such  a  prodigy,  —  he 
said,  "  Now  especially  we  should  enter  into  battle,  when  Jupiter, 
the  greatest  of  the  gods,  shows  that  his  favor  is  with  our  fleet." 

Lesson  50. 

Relative  Pronouns. 

The  general  construction  of  the  Relative  may  be 
defined  as  follows  :  — 

a.  As  a  connective,  it  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender,  per- 
son, and  number ; 

b.  As  a  pronoun,  it  has  its  own  construction  in  its  own  clause. 
Thus  — 

The  Eemi,  who  were  nearest,  sent  ambassadors,  Herni,  qui 
proxiinl  erant,  legdtos  fniserunt. 

Here  qui,  subject  of  erant,  connects  the  relative  to  the  antecedent 
clause  by  agreement  with  Remi,  subject  of  the  main  verb,  miserunt. 

Remark.  —  For  the  various  constructions  of  the  relative  and 
antecedent  clause,  see  the  references  and  examples  in  Lesson  4. 

Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  [Those]  who  were  consulted*  were  in  great  power. 

2.  What  both  the  republic  and  our  friendship  exhort  me, 
[that]  I  do  willingly. 

3.  What  [of]  hostages  were  left,  he  restored. 

4.  There  is  a  place  in  the  prison  which''  is  called Tullianum. 

5.  What  I  value  highest  in  those  matters,  that  I  now  have. 

6.  He  who  hears  an  orator  believes  what    (those    things 
which)  is  said. 

7.  These  divine  and  excellent  qualities  (3ona)  which  we  see 
in  Marcus  Cato,  be  asssured  that  [they]  are  his  own. 

a.  Ablative  absolute.  —  d.  Habitual  action. —  c.  The  relative  agrees  with  the 
predicate. 


94  Latm   Composition. 

8.  This  is  the  origin  of  the  first  temple  (of  all)  that"  was 
consecrated  at  Rome. 

9.  The  letter  which  you  sent  to  me  on  the  march  before 
you  went  out  of  Asia,  I  read  very  unwillingly.^ 

10.  Thither  came  the  magistrates  of  die  Sicilians,  [thither] 
came  the  Roman  knights,  as  {id  quod)  you  have  heard  from 
many  witnesses. 

1 1 .  He  hastens  where  (to  the  place  to  which)  he  had  sent 
Labienus. 

12.  The  pirates  were  at  your  house  one  [month],  a  second 
month,  in  short,  almost  a  year,  from  the  time  when  (from  what 
time)  they  were  taken. 

13.  That  prison  which  is  called  "the  quarries,"  which  was 
made  at  Syracuse  by  the  cruel  (sup.)  tyrant  Dionysius,  was 
the  residence  of  Roman  citizens  under  (in)  the  rule  of  that 
[wretch]. 

Lesson  51. 

Correlatives. 

A  Relative  word  —  Pronoun,  Adjective,  or  Adverb 
—  alv^ays  refers  to,  or  implies,  an  antecedent  word  of 
its  own  class,  and  is  subject  to  the  same  rules  of  Attrac- 
tion or  omission  of  Antecedent  that  have  been  given 
in  the  case  of  relative  Pronouns  {Lesson  4).  The  fol-  / 
lowing  are  the  points  chiefly  requiring  notice  :  — 

a.  When  AS  follows  a  demonstrative  word  —  such,  so,  as  —  it  is 
to  be  considered  a  Relative,  and  rendered  by  the  Correlative  of  the 
antecedent  Demonstrative:  see  lists,  §  106  (G.  645.  i,  2).     Thus  — 

So  (as)  great ...  as,  tantus  .  . .  quantus. 

Sucli ...  as,  talis  .  .  .  qiidlis. 

So  (as)  many  .  .  .  as,  tot .  .  .  quot. 

The  same  ...  as,  Idem  .  . .  qui ;  idem  .  .  .  quod, 

b.  The  correlative  expression  the  .  .  .  the,  with  Comparatives, 

a.  —  which  first  of  all.  —  b.  Adjective. 


Correlatives.  95 

is  to  be  rendered  by  quo  .  .  .  eo,  quanto  .  .  .  tanto  (ablative  of 
degree  of  difference) .     Thus  — 

The  wiser  he  is,  the  less  he  seems  wise  to  himself,  quo  est 
sapientior,  eo  minus  sapiens  sibi  videtur. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  As  much  bravery  as  wisdom.  —  2.  As  many  opinions  as 
men.  —  3.  With  as  great  judgment^"  as  authority.  —  4.  The 
same  ships  as  before.  —  5.  The  lighter,  the  swifter.  —  6.  The 
firmer  I  am,  the  longer  is  the  war. —  7.  "Such  heroes  as  we  have 
never  seen.  —  8.  So  great  enmities  as  you  have  incurred.  — 
9.  How  many  ships  have  the  Romans  built? — 10.  Do  you 
know  how  many  ships  the  Romans  built  ?  —  11.  Did  they  build 
such  ships  as  the  Carthaginians  use? —  12.  They  have  the  same 
arms  as  before. 

Translate  into  L<atin. 

1.  As  often  as  we  speak,  judgment  is"  passed  upon  us. 

2.  There  are  as  many  kinds  of  speech  (of  speaking)  as 
duties  of  the  orator. 

3.  Nor  nevertheless  does  this  require  so  much  labor  ^  as  it 
seems. 

4.  Order''  to  be  promised  to  the  physician  [as  much]  pay 
as  he  shall  demand. 

5.  What  strait,  what  Euripus,  do  you  think  has  so  many 
movements,  so  great  and  so  various  tossings  of  the  waves,  as  '^ 
the  business  of  the  comitia  has  disturbances  and  eddyings  ? 

6.  He  was  not  sorry  to  do  the  same  as  you. 

7.  It  is  not  so  fine  [a  thing]  to  know  Latin,  as  disgraceful 
not  to  know  [it]. 

8.  That  most  severe  war  of  the  Volscians,  in  which  Corio- 
lanus  took-part  [as]  an  exile,  was  at  about  the  same  time  as  the 
war  of  the  Persians. 

9.  [As  much]  land  was  given  as  he  ploughed  around  in  one 
day. 

10.  Bestow  as  much  care  upon  yourself  as  you  have  love  for 
me  (you  love  me). 

a.  The  partitive  genitive  {Lesson  2,^)  cannot  be  used  here;  the  adjective 
must  agree.  —  d.  =  is  of  so  much  labor. —  c.  Imperative. —  d.  quantus. 


96  Latin  Composition. 

11.  The  king  fortifies  [his]  camp  in  the  same  place  in  which 
he  had  routed  the  forces  of  the  enemy. 

12.  PubHus  Servilius  recaptured  the  pirate  with  the  same 
good  fortune'*  with  which  he  had  captured  him. 

13.  The  longer  I  consider,  the  more  obscure  the  matter 
seems  to  me. 

Lesson  52. 

Indefinite  Pronouns. 

The  following  significations  of  the  various  Indefinites 
should  be  carefully  distinguished,  and  the  examples 
below  studied  and  compared. 

a.  Some,  some  one,  or  a  is  aliquis,  quispiam,  or  nescio  quis; 
when  more  definite,  =  A  certain,  quidam :  as, 

Don't  you  see  somebody  in  yonder  field?  videsne  aliquetn 

in  isto  agro? 
A  mercliant  was  wallting  out  yesterday,  iuercdtor  quidam 

herl  deambuldbat, 

b.  Any  is  variously  rendered,  viz., — 

1.  In  a  universal  negative, — not  any,  without  any,  —  by 
quisquam  (subst.)  or  uUus  (adj.)  :  as, 

I  came,  but  saw  nobody,   venl  nee  quemquam  vldi, 
Tlie  boy  did  it  witliout  any  Iielp  at  all,  puer  sine  ullo 
auQcilio  hoc  effecit, 

2.  After  IF,  LEST,  unless,  whether,  also  in  questions  implying 
a  negative,  quis  is  used  in  preference,  though  quisquam  may  be 
used  less  indefinitely.     Thus  — 

Can  anybody  do  this  ]   nmn  quis  hoc  facere  potest  ?  (im- 
plying that  nobody  can). 

3.  In  a  universal  affirmative  —  any  one  whatever — by  quivis, 
quilibet.     Thus  — 

Is  it  for  any  one  [who  will]  to  do  this  ?   num  cujusvls  est 
hoc  facere  ?  (i.e.,  it  can  be  done,  but  not  by  everybody). 

a.  In  the  relative  clause. 


Indefinite  Pronouns.  97 

c.  The  Distributive  each,  every,  is  quisque;  each  (of  tvvo), 
uterque;  every  one  (used  independently,  without  a  subordinate 
clause),  unusquisque:  as, 

Every  one   likes   his   own   best,    suum  cuique  maxime 
placet,  ^ 

Remark.  —  Quisque  stands  rather  in  the  subordinate  than  in 
the  principal  clause  :  as. 

Let  each  strive  as  much  as  he  can,    quantum  quisque 
potest,  tantum  nltatur. 

Compare  §§  93.  c,  202.  d^  e  (G.  305,  with  R.S  645.  2.  r.'^;  H. 

458.  I,  2,  461.  3). 

Examples. 

1.  Do  you  thinlt  anybody  here  is  wiser  than  Solomon?  num 

quemquam  Jiorum  Salomone  sapientiorem  esse 
putds  ? 

2.  A  neighbor  of  ours  is  just  going  to  sail  for  Europe,  vlclnus 

quldam  noster  ad  Eurdpam  ndvigdtilrus  est, 

3.  Did  you  earn  anything  besides  your  board  and  clothes  1 

nuin    quicquain    nieritus    es    jjvaeter    cibum    et 
vestem  ? 

4.  The   little  wasp   is   fiercer  than  any  wild  beast,   parva 

vespa  qudvls  ferd  est  ferociov, 

5.  I  hardly  know  any  one  more  gentlemanly  than  your  friend, 

lieininetn  fere  ainlco  tuo  llherdliorem  novl, 

6.  I  never  heard  anything  more  painful  than  that  news,  isto 

nuntio  nihil  umquam  audlvl  luctuosius, 

7.  The  estate  of  Rome  was  equal  to  any  of  the  neighbor  cities, 

res  Romdna  cuilibet  flnitimdrum  clvitdtum  pdr 
erat, 

8.  The  bravest  men  make  least  noise  about  it,  fortisshnus 

quisque  minime  gloridtur, 

9.  Here  you  see  all  the  resources  I  have,  ihi  vides  quicquid 

habeo  copidrum^ 
10.  The  greater  the  army,  the  more  the  carnage,  quo  mdjor 
exercitus  eo  gravior  clddes  est ;  or,  ut  quisque  est 
exercitus  maxhnus,  ita  gravissima  clddes* 


98  Latin  Composition. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Some  fields. —  2.  In  a  certain  field.  —  3.  Without  any 
danger.  —  4.  Anybody  can  sit  an  hour.  —  5.  Can  anybody  *"  do 
so  great  things  ?  —  6.  Can  somebody  do  this  ?  —  7.  Who  will  do 
this?  —  8.  Will  anybody  do  this? —  9.  It  is  not  everyone^  that 
can  sit  ten  hours. —  10.  Without  anybody. —  11.  Each  will  go 
when  he  is*'  ready. —  12.  All  the  boldest.  —  13.  Each  loves 
his  own  (his  own  [things]  are  dear  to  each).  —  14.  Each  of  the 
scouts  is  ready.  —  15^  Each  took  what  he  pleased  (what  pleased 
each). —  16.  All  the  eloquent  will  be  listened-to.  — 17.  He 
performed  each  of  [his]  duties. 

Translate  into  ILatin. 

1.  A  rude  and  rustic  voice  pleases  some  [persons]. 

2.  He  was  equal  to  anybody  in  speaking  Latin. 

3.  Is  there  any  shame?   any  religion?  any  fear? 

4.  Do  you  think  that  anybody  was  more  moderate  than 
Cato,  your  great-grandfather? 

5.  Ancus  reigned  twenty- four  years,  equal  to  any  of  the 
former  kings  in  the  arts  and  glory  of  war  and  peace. 

6.  I  find  in  some  [writers]  that  in  this  year  was  the  fight  (it 
was  fought)  at  Lake  Regillus. 

7.  He  asked  whether  he  brought  anything  else  besides  the 
chest. 

8.  I  earnestly  beg  of  you  to  bring  [it]  about  that  no  injury 
be  done  to  me,  and  that  no  {7ieve  quid)  time  be  added  to  my 
year's  duty. 

9.  I  understand  that  certain  wonderful  [doctrines]  have 
pleased  some  [men],  who,  I  hear,  have  been  esteemed  wise 
in  Greece. 

10.    Why  do  you  ask  any  one  to  favor  you,  to  aid  you? 

II.  I  neither  dare  nor  ought  to  place  any  burden  upon  you. 

12.  If  any  one  was  ever  averse,  both  by  nature  and  reason 
and  education,  to  empty  praise,  I  certainly  am  he. 

13.  Each  in  order,  as  he  excelled''  in  age  and  honor,  (so) 
spoke  "^  his  opinion. 

a.  Express  this  with  both  meanings.  —  3.  =  it  is  not  of  any  one  you  please, — 
c.   shall  be.  —  d.   Tiic  impericct  dcsciibes,  tliC  perfect  states:  \  113.  b. 


Simple  Conditional  Clauses.  99 

14.  He  summoned  to  himself  all  the  best  and  noblest. 

15.  They  will  be-on-hand  each  in  his  own  time. 

16.  Each  for  himself  migrates  from  the  country  (fields)  into 
the  city. 

17.  In  the  great  need,  each,  in-proportion-to  his  private 
means,  even"  defrauding  himself  of  his  sustenance,  bestowed 
something  upon  him. 

18.  Each  [in  proportion]  as  he  speaks  well  (so:  ita  inaxiinT) 
fears  the  difficulty  of  speaking,  and  the  various  accidents  of 
speech,  and  the  expectation  of  men. 

19.  They  go  to  the  houses  of  those  with  whom  each  had  served. 

20.  It  was  then  the  custom  that^  they  were  ready  to  grant 
(in  granting)  to  each  his  [own]. 

21.  His  own  fraud  and  his  own  terror  chiefly  worry  each. 

22.  It  must  be  considered,  not  how  much  each  benefits,  but 
how  much''  each  is  [worth]. 

23.  The  more  each'^  trusts  himself,  and  the  more  each  is 
fortified  by  virtue  and  wisdom,  the  more  ^  he  excels  in  winning 
and  maintaining  friendship  (plur.). 

24.  Each  formed  opinions,  and  added  something  of  his  own 
fear  to*  that  which  he  had  heard  from  another. 

V.  —  Subordinate  Clauses. 

Note.  —  For  the  definition  pf  the  several  forms  of  Subordinate 
Clause,  see  §  180.  c^  d,  e,  comparing  the  Note  prefixed  to  §  316,  and 
the  lists  of  Subordinate  Conjunctions  in  §  155.  d.-h.  (G.  505,  508; 
H.  555.  i.-viii.).  For  the  Sequence  of  Tenses  in  subordinate  clauses, 
see  Lesson  20,  comparing  Lesson  32. 

Less  011   53. 

Simple  Conditional  Clauses, 

I     The  rules  for  Simple  Conditions  (if)  may  be  stated 
as  follows  (compare  Lesso7i  21)  :  — 

a.  ipse.  —  b.  ut.  —  c.  §  252.  a  (G.  379;  H.  405).  —  d.  Use  quisque  (with 
superlatives).  —  e.   Dative,  or  at/ with  accusative. 


100  Latin  Cornposition, 

a.  When  the  Condition  has  reference  to  present  or  past  time,  — 
that  is,  when  the  existence  or  non-existence  of  the  case  supposed  is 
in  itself  a  matter  of  certainty,  —  use  the  Indicative.     Thus  — 

If  Cato  is  [now]  in  Rome  (of  which  I  am  not  sure),  he  will  call 
upon  me,  si  Cato  Rotnae  est,  me  conveniet, 

b.  For  the  future  time,  either  the  Indicative  or  the  Present  Sub- 
junctive may  be  used ;  the  Future  Indicative  is  equivalent  to  the 
idiomatic  use  of  the  Present  Indicative  in  English  ;  as. 

If  Cato  is  in  Rome  [when  I  arrive]  he  will  call  upon  me,  si 
Cato  Momae  erit,  me  conveniet, 

c.  The  Present  Subjunctive  expresses  a  future  condition  less  dis- 
tinctly, answering  to  the  English  use  of  should  in  the  protasis,  and 
should  or  would  in  the  apodosis.     Thus  — 

If  Cato  should  be  in  Rome  [at  any  future  time]  he  would  call 
upon  me,  si  Cato  Homae  sit,  me  conveniat. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  If  you  are  well,  I  am  glad.  —  2.  If  he  was  not  there,  he 
was  at  Rome.  —  3.  If  this  book  is  yours  (esl  tibi^  give  it  to 
me.  —  4.  If  you  do  rightly,  you  are  praised.  —  5.  If  you  [shall] 
do  rightly,  you  will  be  praised.  —  6.  If  you  should  do  rightly, 
you  would  be  praised.  —  7.  Unless  you  do  rightly,  you  will  not 
be  praised.  —  8.  If  you  did  not  fight,  you  were  cowards.  —  9.  If 
you  do  not  fight,  you  are  cowards. —  10.  If  you  do  not  fight, 
you  will  be  conquered. —  11.  If  Marcus  should  remain,  we 
should  be  glad ;  but  if  he  should  go,  we  should  still  praise  him. 

Translate  into  ILatin. 

1.  If  you  see  the  good  throng  to  me,  will  you  invite  the 
wicked  to  yourself  ? 

2.  If  the  people  should  meet  with  you,  and  could  speak 
with  one  voice,  it  would  say  this. 

3.  If  by  chance  that  which  concerns  me  less  pleases  you 
more,  I  will  restore  that  aedileship  to  you. 

4.  If  you  should  ask  me  what  {quails')  I  consider  the  nature 
of  the  gods  to  be,  I  should  perhaps  make  no  answer. 


Other  Conditional  Clauses.  10 1 

5.  As,  if  any  one  should  say  that  the  republic  of  the 
Athenians  is  ruled  by  counsel,  the  word  {illud)  "  of-the-Areo- 
pagus  "  would  be-understood,  so  when  we  say  that  the  world  is 
controlled  by  providence,  consider  that  "  of  the  gods"  is-under- 
stood. 

6.  If  any  god  should  grant  to  me  that,  from  this  period-of- 
life,  I  might  become-a-boy-again,  and  cry  in  the  cradle,  I  should 
strongly  object. 

7.  If  I  should  desire  from  you  the  greatest  services,  it  ought 
(would  deserve)  to  seem  strange  to  no  one. 

8.  If  I  should  say  this,  that  I  passed  over  the  province  on 
your  account,  I  should  seem  too  fickle  ev^r.  {ipse)  to  you 

Lesson  54.;,  :    : ;  -  .  y, 

other  Conditional  Clauses. 

Other  forms  of  Conditional  Clause  are  as  follows  :  — 

a.  For  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact,  Secondary  Tenses  of  the 
Subjunctive  are  to  be  used :  §  308  (G.  599 ;  H.  510,  with  i).    Thus  — 

If  he  were  [now]  here  he  would  say  thus,  si  adesset  ita 

diceret. 
If  he  had  been  present  he  would  have  said  thus,  si  adfuisset 

ita  dijcisset. 

Remark.  —  The  Indicative  is  often  used  in  the  apodosis  for 
greater  vividness,  especially  with  the  participles,  in  -urus  and  -dus, 
and  with  expressions  of  power j  permission^  etc. :  §  308.  ^,  c,  d  {Q, 
599.  R.^  R.^  R.^  R.^;    H.  511).     Thus  — 

I  was  about  to  fight  [and  should  have  done  it]  had  you  not  in- 
terposed, dlmicdturus  eram  nisi  obstitisses. 

If  he  were  [now]  a  private  man  at  Rome  yet  he  ought  to  be 
appointed,  si  Homae  prlvdtus  esset  tanien  erat 
deligendus  (Cic).     Compare,  in  Indirect  Discourse  — 

I  am  quite  sure  that  he  would  have  come  if  he  could,  certo 
scio  eum  venturum  fuisse  si  jyotuisset, 

b.  In  General  Conditions,  (i)  the  second  person  singular  of  the 
Present  Subjunctive  is  used  to  denote  an  indefinite  subject;  and  (2) 


I02  Latm  Composition. 

in  narrative  the  Secondary  Tenses  are  (by  late  usage)  employed  to 
express  customary  action :  §  309.  a,  b  (G.  597.  R.^,  569.  R."^ ;  H.  486. 
iii.).     The  apodosis  is  in  the  Indicative.     Thus  — 

The   memory   weakens   unless   you   practise   it,   menioria 

minuitur  nisi  earn  exej^ceds* 
When  [ever]  he  had  said  this  he  hurled  a  spear,  tihi  hoc 

clixisset  Jiastam  pnojecit*    (Compare  a,  under  Lesson  22.) 
Other  cases  of  General  Condition  take  the  Indicative. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  If  this  were  so,  I  should  be  glad.  —  2.  If  you  had  gone, 
I  should  have  gone  w^th  you.  —  3.  Unless  I  were  well,  I  should 
not  set  out.  —  4.  If  you  loved  Caesar  (at  some  former  time), 
you  did  well.  7—  5 .  If  you  loved  Caesar  (now,  —  as  you  do  not) , 
';^^6u : would  do  this, — 6.  If  you  had  loved  Caesar,  you  would 
have  done  this. —  7.  I  could  have  helped  him,  had  he  not 
refused.  —  8.  If  a  soldier  met  him  he  [habitually]  saluted  him. 
—  9.    If  you  do  righdy  you  are  happy. 

Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  I  would  write  more,  if  I  thought  that  you  could  read 
longer  {Jam)  with  pleasure. 

2.  If  you  had  gone  to  Britain  also,  surely  no  one  in  that  so 
great  island  would  have  been  more  experienced  than  you. 

3.  If  it  were  necessary  for  me  only  to  speak  against  Later- 
ensis,  nevertheless  even  {ipsutn)  this  would  be  offensive  in  our 
i^eat  {tantus)  intimacy  and  friendship. 

4.  If  he  had  lived  to  [his]  hundredth  year,  would  he  there- 
fore regret  his  old  age  ? 

5.  He  was  a  tribune  of  the  people,  not  perhaps  so  violent 
as  those  whom  you  justly  praise,  but  at-any-rate  such  a  one 
[that]  if  all  had  always  been  like  {qtialis)  [him],  a  violent  tri- 
bune would  never  have  been  desired. 

6.  If  plane-trees  bore  viols  sounding  rhythmically,  of-course 
you  would  judge  that  music  resided  in  plane-trees. 

7.  Whatever  brought  great  advantage  to  the  human  race, 
this  they  thought  took  place  not  without  a  divine  goodness 
towards  men. 


Implied  Conditions.  103 

8.  If  I  were  the  first  to  speak  this  opinion,  you  certainly 
would  praise  [me]  ;  if  the  only  one,  you  at  any  rate  would 
pardon  [me]. 

9.  Should  you  not  think  that  these  men  should  be  torn 
away  from  the  provinces,  if  they  were  not  at-some-time  to  be 
withdrawn  [from  them]  ? 

Lesson   55. 

Implied  Conditions. 

1.  Of  Disguised  Conditions  the  most  frequent  are  — 

a,  A  participial  or  other  qualifying  clause:  §  310.  a  (G.  594. 
I,  2,  3 ;  H.  549.  2).  This  often  takes  the  form  of  the  Ablative 
Absolute :  as, 

If  I  had  received  the  letter  I  should'  have  set  out,  epistuld 
acceptd  profectus  essem, 

b.  An  expression  of  Wish,  Command,  or  hypothetical  statement : 
§  310.  b,  c  (G.  594.  4,  6qo  ;  H.  487.  3). 

2.  Omitted  conditions  are  — 

a.  The  Potential  Subjunctive  (so  called)  :  §  311.  ^  (G.  250,  252-; 
cf  602 2;  H.  485,  486.  i.,  with  N.  I,  2)  ; 

b.  The  Subjunctive  of  cautious  or  doubtful  statement:  §  311.  b 
(G.  250;  H.485). 

Remark.  —  Here  belongs  the  common  use  of  velim,  etc..  in 
polite  wish,  and  velleni  to  denote  what  is  no  longer  possible.  Com- 
pare the  Dubitative  Subjunctive:  §  268  (G.  251,  258;  H.  486.  ii.). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  You  would  have  thought  that  a  god  spoke. —  2.  Who 
would  say  that  this  is  so? — 3.  I  am-inclined-to-believe  that 
Caesar  so  wishes.  —  4.  Why  should  I  say  more?  —  5.  I  wish 
you  were  to  be  here.  —  6.  I  wish  you  were  here.  —  7.  Who 
would  not  rather  be  wise  than  rich? —  8.  This  would  have  been 
disgraceful  !  —  9.  I  should  say  that  you  were  worthy  of  praise. 
— 10.    I  am  sorry  {jiollein)  that  this  has  happened. —  ii.    No 


I04  Latin  Composition. 

one,  not  a  fool,  would  have  thought  so.  —  12.  A  stranger  or  an 
enemy  might  have  said  that.  —  13.  To  look  at  him,  you  would 
say  he  was  a  dunce.  Hear  him  discourse,  and  you  would  call 
him  shrewder  and  wittier  than  Socrates. 

Translate  into  Liatin. 

1.  I  could  wish  {vellem)  that  he  had  been  able  to  conform 
to  your  desire. 

2.  Nor  would  you  find  [any]  other  thing  greater  or  more 
excellent. 

3.  Should  I  have  feared  (imp.  subj.)  that  I,  that  fiercest 
enemy  of  kings,  should  myself  undergo  the  charge  of  a  desire  of 
royalty  ? 

4.  Shall  I  joke  with  you  by  letter,  or  write  something  more 
serious  ? 

5.  Whither  shall  I,  wretch  [that  I  am],  betake  myself?  To 
the  Capitol?  But  it  is  wet  with  the  blood  of  my  brother. 
Home  ?  That  I  may  see  my  wretched  mother  lamenting  and 
distressed  ? 

6.  Why  should  I  not  confess  what  is  necessary? 

7.  As  I  just  said,  in  nearly  all  things,  and  especially  in 
physics,  I  can  tell  what  is  not  [true]  quicker  than  what  is. 

8.  If  I  lay  aside  even  my  enmities  for  the  sake  of  the 
republic,  who,  pray,  would  have  any  right  to  blame  me  (blame 
me  rightfully)  ? 

^  ^  ^  Epistle. 

Cicero  to  his  Atticus. 
I  readily  believe  that  you  are  glad  to  be  at  home.  But  I 
should  like  to  know  what  remains  for  you,  or  whether  you  have 
already  finished.  I  am  expecting  you  in  my  Tusculan  [estate], 
and  the  more  on  this  account,  because  you  wrote  to  Tiro  that  you 
would  come  immediately,  and  added  that  you  thought  there  was 
need.  Altogether  I  used  to  feel  how  much  good  you  did  me 
[when]  present,  but  I  feel  [it]  much  more  since  your  departure. 
Wherefore,  as  I  wrote  to  you  before,  either  I  [must  go]  to  you 
wholly, *"  or  do  you  [come]  to  me  when  you  may. 


a.  Use  the  adjective ;  \  191. 


Comparative  and  Concessive  Clause,  105 

Lesson   56. 

Comparative  and  Concessiye  Clause. 

[  Compare  Lesson  20.] 

Closely    allied    in    construction    and    meaning    to 
Conditional  clauses  are  — 

1.  Comparative  clauses  (introduced  by  AS  if)  :  §  312,  with  Rem. 
(G.  604;  H.  513.  ii.); 

2.  Concessive  clauses  (although)  :  §  313  (G.  606-610  ;  H.  515) ; 

3.  Clauses  of  Proviso  (provided  that)  :    §  314  (G.  575 ;    H. 
513- i-). 

Examples. 

You  stray  as  if  you  were  blind,  errds  tamquam  caecus 
SIS  (compare  Lesson  20). 

Though  you  are  blind  you  do  not  stray,  quamquaTn  cae- 
cus es  taineii  non  errds. 

Provided  the  health  be  good,  valetudo  modo  bona  sit. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.    He  speaks  as  if  he  knew. —  2.    He  spoke  as  if  he  knew. 

—  3.  Although  you  are  wise  I  do  not  believe  you.  —  4.  How- 
ever wise  you  are,  you  do  not  know  the  number  of  the  stars.  — 

5.  Granting  that  you  are  wise,  can  you  foretell  the  future  ?  — 

6.  He  related  Caesar's  death,  as  if  he  had  seen  it.  —  7.  How- 
ever loud  you  speak,  he  will  not  hear  you.  —  8.  Provided  you 
be  wise,  no  one  will  harm  you.  —  9.  Although  the  enemy  (plur.) 
were  near,  they  advanced  as  if  they  knew  there  was  no  danger. 

—  10.  Although  you  be  my  friend,  there  is  yet  a  dispute  be- 
tween us. 

Translate  into  IL.atin. 

1.  Do  not  expect  arguments  from  me,  judges,  as  if  there 
were  some  {aliquid)  doubt. 

2.  Why  do  I  make  use  of  these  witnesses,  as  if  the  matter 
were  doubtful  or  obscure  ? 

3.  Their  natural  powers  remain  to  old  men,  provided  their 
interest  and  industry  continue. 


io6  Latin  Composition. 

4.  Although  old  age  be  not  burdensome,  yet  it  takes  away 
that  vigor  in  which  Scipio  was  even  now. 

5.  Scipio,  a  very  few  days  before  his  death,  as  if  he  presaged 
[it],  discoursed  for  three  days  on  public  affairs. 

6.  The  territory,  granting  that  there  be  ten  acres  apiece, 
cannot  support  more  than  five  thousand  men. 

7.  [This]  excellent  man 'is  on  his  guard  not  to  buy  (;2?with 
subj.)  from  [one  who  is]  unwilling.  As  if  truly  we  did  not  under- 
stand that  to  buy  from  one  who  is  unwilling  is  a  losing  [job]  ; 
from  one  who  is  willing,  profitable. 

8.  Although  he  is  not  at  all  to  be  despised  in  speaking,  yet 
he  depends  rather  upon  his  foresight  of  important  matters  than 
upon  his  skill  (^ars)  in  speaking. 

9.  If  you  had  brought  me  Sicyonian  slippers,  I  would  not 
use  [them],  however  comfortable  and  well-fitted  to  the  foot  they 
were,  because  they  are  not  manly. 

10.   Let  them  hate,  provided  they  fear. 


Lesson  57. 

Temporal  Clauses. 

Relative  clauses  of  Time  (when,  while,  until) 
may  be  regarded  according  as  their  action  precedes, 
follows,  or  accompanies  that  of  the  leading  clause. 

a.  Time  preceding  that  of  the  leading  verb,  being  definite  and 
precise,  is  expressed  by  the  Indicative  (generally  the  Perfect),  intro- 
duced by  postquam,  etc. :  §  324  (G.  563 ;  H.  471.  4). 

b.  For  iivcxe  followmg  that  of  the  leading  verb,  may  be  used  — 

1.  To  state  the  limit, ^i"  a  fact,  the  tenses  of  the  Indicative: 
§§  327.  a,  c,  328  (G.  576-578,  573 ;  H.  519.  i.,  521.  i.  2)  ; 

2.  In  narration,  more  commonly,  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  sub- 
junctive with  antequam  or  priusquam :  §  327  ;  cf.  325  (G.  579 ; 
H.  520.  ii.)  ; 

3.  To  imply  purpose,  the  Subjunctive  with  dum,  donee,  quoad: 
§328(0.574;  H.  519.  ii.). 


Temporal  Clauses.  1 07 

Remark.  —  Antequam  and  priusquam  are  often  divided  into 
two  words,  when  the  ante  or  prius  stands  as  an  adverb  in  the  prin- 
cipal clause,  and  quam  introduces  the  subordinate  clause ;  in  this 
case  they  are  to  be  translated  together  in  the  subordinate  clause  as 
before  or  tnitil ;  as, 

K^or  did  he  let  him  go  until  he  gave  a  pledge,  neque  ante 
dlmlsit  eiun  quam  ficlem  dedit, 

c.  Time  accompanying  that  of  the  leading  verb  regularly  takes 
the  Present  Indicative  with  dum,  even  when  it  relates  to  past  time : 
§  276.  e  (G.  572  ;  H.  467.  4).     Thus  — 

While  these  things  were  going  on,  word  was  brouglit,  dii'in 
haec  geruntur,  niifitldtuni  est. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  We  will  wait  until  you  arrive.  —  2.  I  will  see  you  before 
Caius  sets  out.  —  3.  I  saw  you  before  Caius  set  out.  —  4.  While 
he  was  standing,  the  enemy  escaped.  —  5.  After  they  had  crossed 
the  river,  they  w^ere  attacked  by  the  Gauls.  —  6.  Before  they 
reached  the  town,  fighting  began.  —  7.  While  these  things  were 
going  on,  Caesar  set  out  with  the  tenth  legion.  —  8.  As  soon  as 
I  saw  you,  I  cried  out.  —  9.  He  cried  out"*  before  he  saw  me. 
—  10.  He  cried  out"  until  I  came  to  him. —  11.  You-may 
(lice/)  sleep  as-long-as  you  fear  nothing. —  12.  He  will  keep-on 
{persevero^)  until  he  reaches  [his]  end. — 13.  So-far- as  custom 
permits,  I  will  proceed. 

Translate  into  !Latin. 

1.  It  greatly  concerns  each  of  us,  that  I  see  you  before  you 
go  away.^ 

2.  He  brought  all  together  into  one  place,  before  word 
could  be  brought  to  the  Arvernians  of  his  arrival. 

3.  The  Gauls  crossed  into  Italy  two  hundred  years  before 
they  laid  siege  to  Clusium  and  took  Rome. 

4.  He  would  have  surpassed  the  happiness  {for tuna)  of  all, 
if  it  had  been  his  (dat.)  good-fortune  (contingit)  to  see  (ut, 
etc.)  you  before  he  departed  ^  from  life. 

a.  Notice  the  tense.  —  b.  Subjunctive. 


io8  Latin  Composition. 

5.  Before  I  approach  those  [points]  which  have  been  dis- 
cussed by  you,  I  will  say  what  I  think  of  you  yourself. 

6.  While  he  delayed  a  few  days,  fear  suddenly  seized  upon 
all  the  army. 

7.  I  wish  you  would  call-to-mind  what  I  did  in  the  Senate 
in  regard  to  you  after  you  set  out,  what  I  said  in  the  assemblies, 
what  letters  I  sent  to  you.      * 

Anecdote. 

Cornelia,  the  mother  of  the  Gracchi,  when  a  Campanian 
matron  (a  guest  at  her  house)  was  showing  her  most  beautiful 
ornaments,  detained  her  by  conversation  until  her  children  re- 
turned from  school ;  and  then  said,"  "  These  are  my  ornaments." 

Lesson  58. 

Special  Uses  of  Cum. 

The  use  of  the  particle  cum  requires  to  be  especially 
noticed,  as  employed  to  express  — 

1.  Absolute  time,  with  the  Indicative:  §  325,  with  Note,  and  a, 
b,c{G.  S^2-sSS'.  H.  318.  3); 

2.  Relative  time,  with  the  Secondary  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive: 
§325  (G.  586;  H.  521.  ii.  I); 

3.  Cause  or  Concession  (since,  while,  though),  with  the  Sub- 
junctive :  §  326  (G.  587.  R. ;  H.  517.  I,  515.  iii.). 

Examples. 

When  he  had  come,  cum  venisset. 
When  he  comes  (shall  come),  cum  veniet. 
Since  he  has  arrived,  cum  adveiierit. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  When  I  am  at  Athens,  I  always  visit  Mars'  Hill. — 
2.  When  I  am  at  Athens,  I  shall  visit  Mars'  Hill.  —  3.  When 
I  was  at  Athens,  I  visited  Mars'  Hill.  —  4.  When  I  leave 
Athens,  I  shall  return  to  Rome.  —  5.    Since  night  is  approach- 

a.   Use  Inquam, 


special  Uses  of  Cum.  1O9 

ing,  let  us  depart.  —  6.    Since  night  was  approaching,  they  sep- 
arated.—  7.    When  night  approached,  they  separated. 

Translate  into  Liatin. 

1.  When  I  compare  my  action  with  yours,  although  I  do 
not  favor  myself  more  than  [I  do]  you,  nevertheless  I  am  much 
better  {i?iagis)  pleased  with  my  action  than  yours. 

2.  When  ambassadors  had  come  to  him  to  beg"  that  he 
would  pardon  them  and  consult  for  their  lives ^  (sing.),  he  orders 
the  arms  to  be  collected,  the  horses  to  be  brought  forward, 
[and]  hostages  to  be  given. 

3.  You  who  ask  this,  do  somewhat  {similiter^  as  if  you 
asked  me  why  I  look  at  you  with  two  eyes  and  not  with  one 
(alter) ^  since  I  can  accomplish  the  same  thing  with  one. 

4.  He  was  acquitted  by  an  assembly  *"  of  the  Roman  people, 
although  he  confessed  that  his  sister 'had  been  killed  by  his 
hand. 

Anecdote. 

Agesilaus,  the  Lacedaemonian,  when  he  had  placed  his  camp 
opposite  the  Thebans  above  a  river-bank,  and  understood  that 
the  force  of  the  enemy  was  much  greater,  and  for-this-reason 
wished  to  restrain  his  men  from  the  desire  of  fighting,  said  that 
he  was  ordered  by  an  oracle  of  the  gods  to  fight  on  high  ground 
(ex  collihis)  ]  and  so,  placing  a  small  guard  at  the  bank,  he  ap- 
proached the  hills.  [But]  the  Thebans  interpreting  this"^  (as  p7'd) 
fear,  crossed  the  river ;  and  when  they  had  easily  driven  back 
the  guard,  following  the  rest  too  eagerly,^  they  were  beaten  by 
fewer  men,  on  account  of  the  disadvantage  of  the  position. 

Dialogue. 

Tranio.    Look  around  again. 

Theopropides.   There  is  no  one.     Speak  now  at  once. 

Tr.    It  is  a  fatal  deed. 

Th.  What  is  that  ?     I  don't  understand. 

a.  Supine  in  iim.  —  /;.  Dative, —  c.  The  assembly  was  not  regarded  as  a 
person,  or  corporate  body,  but  as  a  mere  instrument  of  action.  —  d.  Relative. 

—  e.    Comparative  :   ^^  93.  a. 


no  Latin  Composition. 

Tr.  a  crime,  I  say,  was  committed  long  ago,  old  and  ancient ; 
this  deed  we  have  just  now  discovered. 

Th.  What  villainy  is  that,  or  who  did  it?     Tell  me. 

Tr.  a  host  killed  his  guest  [whom  he  had]  caught  with  his 
hand.     He,  as  I  think,  who  sold  this  house  to  you. 

Th.   Killed? 

Tr.  And  took  away  gold  from  [that]  same  guest,  and  buried 
that  guest  here  in-this-very-place  in  the  house. 

Th.  Why  do  you  suspect  that  this  was  done  ? 

Tr.  I  will  tell  [you].  Listen.  When  your  son  had  dined  out 
{/oris),  after  he  returns  home  from  supper,  we  all  go  to  bed. 
We  went  to  sleep.  I  had  forgotten  by  chance  to  put  out  the 
light ;  and  he  all-of-a-sudden  cries  out  at-the-top-of-his-voice. 

Th.  Who?   my  son? 

Tr.  St,  —  be  quiet ;  he  says  that  that  dead  man  came  to  him 
in  sleep.  This  is  {ecce)  what  that  dead  man  said  to  him  :  "  I 
am  Diapontius,  a  guest  from-beyond-sea.  Here  I  dwell.  This 
dwelling  was  given  to  me.  For  Orcus  would  not  {iibluit^  re- 
ceive me  to  Acheron,  because  I  am  deprived  of  life  prematurely. 
I  was  deceived  through  confidence.  My  host  here  killed  me, 
and  he  buried  me  secretly  in  this  house,  the  villain,  for  the  sake 
of  gold.  Now  do  thou  depart  hence.  This  house  is  accursed ; 
this  dwelling  is  impious." 

Lesson  59. 

Causal  Clauses. 

Causal  clauses  regularly  take  the  Indicative ;  but 
they  take  the  Subjunctive  when  the  reason  is  not  simply 
stated  as  a  fact,  but  assigned  as  a  motive  :  as, 

Socrates  was   accused  of  corrupting  the  youth,  Socrates 
accusdtus  est  quod  corrmnperet  juventutem, 

a.  This  is  regularly  the  case  with  relative  clauses  expressing  a 
reason:  as, 

Since  I  see,  quippe  qui  videam. 


Causal  Clauses.  ill 

b.  In  negative  clauses  non  quo  may  be  used  in  preference  to 
non  quod  or  non  quia:  compare  §  341.  R.  (G.  538.  R.,  541.  R.* ; 
H.  516.  11.  2)  :  as, 

Not  that  I  fear,  non  quo  timemn. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  He  hates  me,  because  I  am  luckier  than  he.  —  2.  He 
hates  me  on- the -ground-that  I  have  thwarted  him.  —  3.  He  is 
fortunate  in  having  you  with  him.  —  4.  Since  Csesar  is  my 
friend,  I  dare  resist  you.  —  5.  Since  [he  thought]  Csesar  was 
absent,  he  opposed  his  plans.  —  6.1  resisted  him,  not  that  I 
thought  him  an  enemy,  but  I  did  not  approve  his  designs. 

Translate  into  L.atin. 

1.  Although,  as  I  have  written  you  before,  wherever  you 
are,  you  are  in  the  same  boat  [with  me],  yet  I  congratulate 
you  on  your  absence,  because  you  do  not  see  the  things  that 
we  [see]. 

2.  I  congratulate  you  on  being  absent. 

3.  He  accuses  them  of  having  held  discourses  of  this  sort 
concerning  him. 

4.  I  had  said  that  this  first  point  needed  no  argument, 
because  it  is*  clear  to  all  that  there  are  gods. 

5 .  I  appeared  to  bear  my  misfortune  bravely,  —  not  that  I 
bore  it  with  equanimity,  but  I  consoled  myself  [by]  thinking 
that  there  would  not  be  a  long  separation  between  us. 

6.  I  did  not  accept  even  that ;  not  that  I  thought  [it]  in- 
consistent with  my  dignity,  but  because  I  did  not  suspect  that 
so  great  a  crime  was  hanging  over  the  republic. 

7.  If  you  did  not  know  that  Metellus  thought  thus  {haec) 
of  me,  you  ought  to  consider  that  your  brother  kept  you  igno- 
rant^ [in  regard  to]  the  most  important  matters  ;  but  if,  however, 
he  imparted  to  you  something  of  his  plan,  I  ought  to  be  con- 
sidered lenient  and  easy  by  you,  since  I  make  no  complaint  to 
{ciini)  you  in  regard  to  these  very  matters. 

a.  Follow  the  rule  of  sequence  of  tenses.  —  b.  celo,  with  the  accusative  of 
the  person.  —  c.    —  "complain  [as  to]  nothing." 


112  Latin  Composition. 

Anecdote. 

Tarquin  the  Proud,  the  father,  thinking  that  the  chiefs  of  the 
Gabinians  ought  to  be  put  to  death,  because  he  was  not  wiUing 
that  this  should  be  entrusted  to  any  one,  made  no  answer"  to 
the  messenger  who  had  been  sent  him  by  his  son  ;  nevertheless 
he  struck  off  with  a  staff  the  tall  poppy-heads,  since  by  chance 
he  was  walking  in  a  garden.  ^  The  messenger,  having  returned 
without  an  answer,  brought  word  to  the  young  Tarquin  what  he 
had  seen  his  father  doing.  He  understood  that  the  same  thing 
was  to  be  done  to  the  eminent  Gabinians. 

Lesson  60. 

Final  Clauses. 

Clauses  expressing  a  Purpose  require  the  Subjunc- 
tive with  tit  (negatively  7ie)  or  a  relative  :  as, 

He  sent  men  to  plough  the  field,  homines  mlsit  ut  [qui] 
agvuin  ararent. 

Remark.  —  For  the  various  expressions  of  Purpose,  see  §  318, 
with  a,  b,  c,  d  (G.  544.  R.^).  For  the  use  of  ut  and  ne,  widi  ex- 
pressions of  Fear,  see  Lesson  29,  Remark. 

a.  In  negative  clauses  ne  quis,  ne  quid,  ne  umquam,  etc., 
must  be  used  for  ut  nemo,  ut  nihil,  ut  numquam,  etc. :  these 
last  are  used  in  clauses  of  Result. 

b.  When  there  is  a  comparative  in  the  sentence,  quo  is  generally 
used  in  preference  to  ut:  as, 

That  he  miglit  come  the  sooner,  quo  citius  veniret. 

c.  Substantive  clauses  which  express  a  Purpose,  following  verbs 
of  wishing,  advising,  necessity,  &c.,  often  omit  the  ut  or  ne:  §  331. 
/.  Rem.  (G.  546.  R.=^;  H.  499.  2)  ; 

d.  With  phrases  like  ut  ita  dicam,  so  to  speak ;  ne  plura 
dicam,  not  to  say  niore^  the  principal  clause  is  often  omitted; 
§  2>^1'  ^• 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.    I  have  come  to  meet  you.  —  2.   I  came  to  meet  Balbus. 
—  3.  This  is  a  pleasant  spot,  not  to  say  delightful.  —  4.  He  is  a 

a,  =  answered  nothing. 


Final  Clauses.  113 

brave  man,  —  I  do  not  say  a  good  man.  —  5.  We  fight  that  we 
may  not  be-slaves.  —  6.    He  is  another  Plato,  so  to  speak. 

7.  They  founded  a  city  which  should  be  a  refuge  to  the  dis- 
tressed.—  8.  We  listen,  that  we  maybe  more  wise.  —  9.  We 
set  out  at  once  in  order  that  we  might  arrive  earlier. —  10.  Be- 
ware of  pardoning.  —  11.    It  is  necessary  that  we  set  out. 

12.  I  will  ask  him  to  come.  —  13.  I  wish  you  were  at  Rome. 
—  14.  Now,  to  pass  over  such  [points],  I  will  speak  of  making 
peace. —  15.  I  fear  you  are  not  sufficiently  wily. —  16.  He 
feared  that  the  Gauls  would  attack  him  on  the  march.  —  17.  I 
fear  he  will  not  win  the  royal  power. 

Translate  into  ILatin. 

1.  Three  hundred  of  us  (we,  three  hundred),  chiefs  of  the 
Roman  youth,  have  sworn  to  assault  you. 

2.  I  think  that  something  should  be  given  the  physician 
himself,  that  he  may  be  more  zealous. 

3.  He  sends  forward  to  the  Boii  [men]  who  shall  inform 
[them]  of  his  arrival,  and  exhort  them  to  remain  in  their  fidel- 
ity, and  withstand  the  attack  of  the  enemy  with  good  courage. 

4.  She  whispers  to  (with)  herself,  but  [so]  that  I  may  hear. 

5.  In  the  first  place,  I  wish  you  to  consider  this,  —  that 
your  feehngs  are  strongly  approved  by  me  (dat.). 

6.  This  one  thing  I  do  not  know,  whether  to  congratulate 
[you]  or  fear  for  you ;  not  that  I  fear  that  your  virtue  will  not 
meet  the  expectation  of  men,  but,  by  Hercules,  lest,  when  you 
come  (fut.  perf.),  you  have  no  longer  [any  thing]  to  care  for 
{qicod,  etc.). 

7.  As  I  myself  have  always  joined  Latin  with  Greek,  I 
am  of  opinion  that  you  should  do  the  same,  that  you  may  be 
equally-good  {par)  in  the  use  of  each  language  {serjuo). 

8.  I  wish  you  would  send  letters  as  often  as  possible,  espe- 
cially if  there  shall  be  any  better-established  [state  of  things], 
in-regard-to-which  "^  we  may  have-hope. 

9.  But,  to  pass  over  the  common  cause,  let  us  come  to  ours. 

a.   Use  the  relative. 


114  Latin   Composition, 

10.  Do  you  think,  pray,  that  it  was  easier  for  Ligarius  to  go 
out  of  Africa,  or  for  you  not  to  come  into  Africa  ? 

11.  I  fear,  Crassus,  that  I  cannot  concede  those  two  points 
to  you. 

12.  Do  not  fear,  Hortensius,  that  I  shall  ask  how  it  was  per- 
mitted to  a  senator  to  build  a  ship. 

Anecdote. 

Manius  Curius,  the  most  perfect  type  of  Roman  frugality,  and 
at  the  same  time  the  most  complete  model  of  bravery,  presented 
himself  to  the  ambassadors  of  the  Samnites,  sitting  at  the  hearth 
on  a  rude  stool,  and  dining  out  of  a  wooden  bowl.  For  he  des- 
pised the  wealth  of  the  Samnites,  [and]  the  Samnites  wondered 
at  his  poverty.  For  when  they  had  brought  to  him  a  great 
weight  of  gold,  sent  by  the  state  {public'e),  he,  when  invited 
with  kind  words  to  be  willing  to  use  it,  broke  into  laughter,  and 
said  at  once  :  "  Agents  of  a  superfluous,  not  to  say  foolish, 
mission,  report  to  the  Samnites  that  Manius  Curius  would  rather 
rule  the  rich  than  himself  be  rich ;  and  carry  back  that  costly 
gift,  and  remember  that  I  can  neither  be  conquered  in  battle 
nor  corrupted  by  money." 

/  Lesson  6i. 

Consecutive  Clauses, 

Clauses  of  Result,  like  those  of  Purpose,  take  the 
Subjunctive  after  ut  or  with  a  relative  :  as. 

They  place  their  chariots  in  such  a  way  that  they  have  a 
speedy  retreat,  ita  currus  conlocant,  ut  expedltum 
receptufn  habeant, 

a.  In  negative  clauses  of  Result,  ut  non  is  used  instead  of  ne, 
ut  nemo  for  ne  quis,  etc. 

b.  After  secondary  tenses  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  may  be  used 
in  clauses  of  Result,  to  represent  the  historical  perfect  of  the  direct 
statement:  as, 

The  discussion  reached  such  a  height  that  he  fled  to  Yitellius, 
eo  discordiae  ventum  lest] ,  ut  ad  Vitellium  per-' 
fugerit  (Direct,  ad  Vitellium  jierfUgit). 


Consecutive  Clauses,  115 

c.  The  relative  is  often  used  in  clauses  of  Result,  where  the  Eng- 
lish idiom  uses  as  with  the  infinitive.     Thus  — 

Who  is  so  silly  as  to  believe  this?  quis  est  tarn  ineptus 
qui  hoc  credat  ? 

d.  A  peculiar  construction  in  Latin  is  the  phrase  tantum  abest, 
followed  by  an  ut  clause  as  subject  and  another  as  result :  §  332.  d 
(G.  556.  R.^   H.  502.3). 

It  is  so  far  [from  being  true]  that  friendships  are  sought  on 
account  of  need,  that  those  who  need  another  least  are 
the  most  liberal,  tantum  abest  ut  amlcitiae  propter 
indigentiam  colantur,  ut  11  qui  ininime  alterius 
indiqeantf  llberdlissiml  sint. 

Here  the  substantive  clause  ut  .  .  .  colantur  is  subject  of  abest, 
and  the  consecutive  clause  ut  .  .  .  sint  depends  upon  tantum. 

Remark.  —  For  the  use  of  quominus  and  quin  in  clauses  of 
Result,  see  §  319.  c,  d  (G.  547,  549-551 ;  H.  504,  497.  ii.). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  Who  is  so  rash  as  to  dare  this? —  2.  The  river  is  so  swift 
that  we  cannot  swim  in  it.  —  3.  The  cold  is  so  great  that  wine 
freezes.  —  4.  I  am  so  far  {abest,  not  absu7ti)  from  being  un- 
friendly to  you,  that  I  value  you  very  highly.  —  5 .  Caesar  was 
so  far  from  being  defeated  that  he  even  pursued  the  enemy. 

6.  The  peril  was  so  great  that  we  fled.  —  7.  I  am  not  so  sus- 
picious as  not  to  believe  you.  —  8.  Nothing  hinders  me  from 
aiding  Pompey.  —  9.  Nothing  hindered  me  from  aiding  you.-^ — 
10.  I  shall  never  be  prevented  from  rejoicing.  —  11.  There  is 
no  doubt  that  Rome  is  the  capital  of  the  world. 

12.  We  do  not  object  to  your  thinking  us  foolish.  —  13. 
Caius  left  nothing  undone  to  frustrate  my  plans.  —  14.  He  was 
within  a  little  of  (it  was  very  little  distant  but  that)  reaching  the 
city.  —  15.  It  cannot  be  {fiei'i)  but  that  you  believe  this.  —  16. 
It  was  owing  to  you  that  I  did  not  go. 

Translate  into  liatin. 

I.  His  speeches  have  so  much  wit,  so  many  illustrations,  so 
much  elegance,  that  they  almost  seem  to  have  been  written  in 
Attic  style. 


Il6  Latin  Composition. 

2.  Will  no  virtue,  therefore,  ever  be  so  respected  by  you** 
that  it  cannot  be  injured  by  suspicion  ? 

3.  There  cannot  be  readily  found  [one]  who  can  give  bet- 
ter counsel  to  another  (alter)  than  you ;  but  at  any  rate  no  one 
will  give  better  to  you  yourself. 

4.  If  there  are  but  few  who  love  the  nobility,  is  that  our  fault  ? 

5.  I  cannot  help  (praetereo)  sending  to  you  daily. 

6.  He  is  so  far  from  influencing  my  opinion,  that  I  think  he 
himself  should  be  very  much  ashamed  at  having  departed  from 
his  [own]  opinion. 

7.  What  shrine  in  Achaia,  what  place  or  sacred-grove,  has 
been  so  [held]  sacred  that  any  image  or  ornament  is  left  in  it  ? 

8.  And  yet  I  do  not  doubt  that  eloquence  has  always  had 
great  force. 

9.  How  can  it  be  doubted  that  the  glory  of  military  service 
brings  much  more  of  worthiness  to  win  the  consulship  than 
[that]  of  civil  law?     (Worthiness  =  dignitas.) 

10.  I  could  not  help  writing  to  you,  and  giving  thanks. 

11.  Caesar,  fearing  for  his  men,  sent  to  Titus  Sextius,  the 
lieutenant,  that  he  should  lead  his  cohorts  quickly  out  of  the 
camp,  in  order  that  he  might  terrify  the  enemy  from  pursuing 
freely. 

Epistle. 

Cicero  to  his  Atticus, 

I  had  not  doubted  that  I  was  to  see  you  at  Tarentum  or 
Brundisium,  and  this  had  reference  to  many  [points]  ;  among 
them,  that  we  might  tarry  in  Epirus  and  use  your  counsel  on 
other  things.  Since  this  has  not  happened,  this  also  will  b 
[ranked]  in  the  great  number  of  our  misfortunes.  Our  route  is 
to  Asia,  especially  to  Cyzicum.  I  commend  my  [family]  to  you. 
I  sustain  myself  with  difficulty,  and  wretchedly.  Given  April  1 7, 
near  Tarentum  (Tarent'inmri) } 

a,   =  "  in  your  eyes,",  tibi.  —  b.   de  with  abl. 


Clauses  of  Characteristic.  iiy 

Lesson  62. 

Clauses  of  Characteristic. 

A  RELATIVE  clause  with  the  subjunctive  is  often  used 
to  express  a  Characteristic  of  the  antecedent,  contain- 
ing more  or  less  distinctly  the  idea  of  result.     Thus  — 

They   say   a    great   deal   which    they   scarcely   understand, 
multa  dlciint  quae  vioc  intellegant. 

Note.  —  Here  the  indicative,  intellegunt,  would  indicate  things 
which  they  do  not  m  fact  understand.  The  use  of  the  subjunctive 
implies  that  the  things  are  so  difficult,  or  the  speakers  so  stupid, 
that  they  cannot  understand  them.  Clauses  which  occur  under  this 
head  are  — 

1.  Those  following  general  expressions  of  existence :  §  320.  a 
(G.634;  H.  503.  i.); 

2.  Following  unus  and  solus :  id.  b  (G.  (y^Z  5  H.  id.  ii.)  ; 

3.  Following  Comparatives  with  quam  ( —  too  .  .  .  to)  :  id.  c 
(G.313;  H.  id.  3); 

4.  Of  Restriction  or  Proviso,  especially  with  quod :  id.  d  (G. 
629.  R. ;   H.  503.  i.  3,  N.  2)  ; 

5.  Of  Cause  or  Hindrance  :  id.  e  (G.  636,  6y]  ;  H.  517,  515.  ii.  4)  ; 

6.  Following  digiius,  etc.  (—  worthy  to  . . .)  :  id.  f  (G.  556.  R.'^ ; 
H.  503.  ii.  2). 

Remark.  —  After  general  negative  expressions,  where  the  Eng- 
lish uses  BUT,  quin  is  often  used  for  qui  (quod,  etc.)  11611:  as, 

There  is  no  one  but  says  this,  neino  est  quln  hoc  dlcat. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  I  am  not  worthy  of  receiving  these  honors.  —  2.  He  is  not 
lit  to  have  those  honors  bestowed  upon  him  (upon  whom  these 
honors  should  be  bestowed).  —  3.  Caesar  is  the  only  one  to 
whom  such  honors  are  due.  —  4.  There  are  [some]  who  envy 
me.  —  5.  There  were  [some]  who  envied  me.  —  6.  He  is  too 
shrewd  to  be  deceived  (shrewder  than  who  can  be  deceived). 
—  7.  Who  is  there  that  thinks  Titus  mad?  —  8.  Who  was  there 
that  thought  Marcus  wise?  —  9.  There  was  nothing  that  you  did 
not  see.  — 10.   There  was  no  one  but  thought  you  rash.  — 


1 1 8  \  Latin  Composition. 

II.   Who  is  there  but  thinks  us  wise? —  12.   You  were  the  only 
one  to  receive  such  rewards. 

Translate  into  ILatin. 

1.  There  will  be  many  to  whom  you  can  properly  give  let- 
ters, who  will  gladly  bring  them  to  me. 

2.  Nor  was  there  any  oije  who  cared  for  booty. 

3.  There  were  [some]  at  that  time  who  believed  that  Mar- 
cus Crassus  had  not  been  ignorant  of  this  design. 

4.  There  is  no  reason  for  you  to  hurry. 

5.  On  {ex)  each  side  there  are  some  who  desire  to  con- 
tend. 

6.  This  is  the  only  place  to  which  {quo)  they  may  escape. 

7.  Who  is  there  of  those  Greeks,  who  thinks  that  any  one 
of  us  understands  any  thing  ? 

8.  There  is  no  one  of  us  but  knows  that  you  have  no  enmi- 
ties with  Sextus  Roscius. 

9.  I  have  no  reason  to  find  fault  with  old  age. 

10.  There  is  no  one  but  understands  that  that  republic  is 
falling. 

11.  I  ask  you  this,  my  Tiro,  that  you  spare  expense  in  noth- 
ing, so  far  as  there  is  need  for  your  health. 

Lesson  63. 

Inflnitive  Clanses. 

\_Compare  Lessofis  6,  24-26.] 

The  following  special  forms  of  Infinitive  Clause  are 
liable  to  occur,  especially  in  the  extended  use  of  Indi- 
rect Discourse  :  — 

1.  The  Periphrastic  Infinitive,  formed  by  fore  or  futurum  esse 
with  the  Subjunctive,  which  is  regular  with  verbs  which  have  no 
supine  stem,  and  is  especially  common  after  spero :  §  288. /*(G.  240. 
2;  H.  537,  with  I). 

2.  The  Infinitive  of  Impersonal  verbs,  or  the  neuter  of  the  Ge- 
rundive with  esse,  in  such  phrases  as  — 


Infinitive  Clauses.  119 

He  saw  that  he  must  leap  down,  vldit  desiliendii^n  esse 

(Direct,  desilienduiu  est), 
A  report  came  to  the  Senate  that  it  had  rained  blood,  san- 

guinem  pluisse  sendtul  nuntidtiim  est, 

3.   Rhetorical  Questions  in  Indirect  Discourse  (see  Lesson  27.  a). 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  I  hope  to  be  able.  —  2.  He  says  that  we  shall  soon  be 
willing.  —  3.  He  said  that  he  should  not  fear.  —  4.  I  under- 
stand that  fighting- is-going-on. —  5.  I  understand  that  fighting 
has  been  going  -on.  —  6.  I  understood  that  fighting  was  going 
on. —  7.  Remember  that  you  are  envied."  —  8.  He  says  that 
fortune  will  again  shine  upon  us.  —  9.  Do  you  think  that  [we] 
must  fight? — 10.  I  do  not  think  a  rich  [man]  ought  to  be 
envied. 

Translate  into  ILatin. 

1.  They  said  they  hoped  that  these  designs  which  had 
been  secretly  entered  into,  contrary  to  the  safety  of  the  city  and 
empire,  would  be  brought  to  light. 

2.  All  were  of  opinion  that  an  addition  would  be  enrolled 
in  Italy  for  my  legions  and  [those]  of  Bibulus. 

3.  You  write  that  the  physician  is  well  esteemed  (that  it  is 
well  thought  concerning,  &c.). 

4.  He  will  say  that  he  always  wished  to  be  asked,  always  to 
be  entreated. 

5.  Why  [he  asked]  did  they  urge^  him,  already  an  old  man, 
and  [one  who  had]  passed  through  [all]  labors  and  the  rewards 
of  labors  ? 

6.  Why,  pray  [he  asked],  did  they  fear,  or  why  did  they 
despair  of  their  own  valor  or  his  {ipse)  care  ? 

7.  If  these  things  {quae)  [he  urged]  were  not  to  be  borne 
in  a  king,  or  the  son  of  a  king,  who  would  bear  [them]  in  so 
many  private  persons?    Let  them  see  [to  it],  lest  by  forbidding 

a.  Verbs  which  govern  the  dative  still  govern  the  dative  when  used  imper- 
sonally in  the  passive.  —  b.  In  all  these  sentences  consider  whether  the  ques- 
tion is  real  or  rhetorical. 


I20  Latin  Composition. 

men  to  speak  freely  in  the  senate -house,  they  should  even  excite 
talk  outside  the  senate-house.  When  they  wished,  let  them  test 
how  much  braver  is"  a  sense-of-grief  than  self-seeking.  For 
what  had  they  done  by^  the  people?  Let  them  not  place  too 
much  hope  in  others'  fear  ! 

8.  Then  Ahala  Servilius,  tribune  of  the  soldiers,  says  that  he 
has  been  silent  so  long,  not  because  he  was  uncertain  in  opinion," 
—  for  what  good  citizen  separates  his  own  counsels  from  the 
public  [counsels]  ?  —  but  because  he  chose  that  his  colleagues 
should  yield  of  their  own  accord  to  the  authority  of  the  Senate 
rather  than  suffer  (imp.  subj.)  the  power  of  the  tribunes  to  be 
called  upon  against  themselves.  » 

Lesson  64. 

Intermediate  Clauses. 

The  cases  in  which  an  intermediate  relative  clause 
must  take  the  Subjunctive  are  the  following  :  — 

1.  When  the  clause  expresses  the  thought  of  some  other  person 
than  the  speaker  or  writer  or  his  own  in  some  other  relation  {infor- 
mal indirect  discourse)  ; 

2.  When  the  clause  is  an  integral  part  of  a  subjunctive  or  mfini- 
tive  construction  {attraction). 

Remark.  —  Many  such  clauses  may  be  so  regarded  or  not,  as  the 
speaker  or  writer  chooses.    Compare  the  following  examples  :  — 

1.  He  first  mentioned  that  of  which  I  have  just  spoken  (direct 

statement),  wMch  (according  to  him)  had  its  origin  in  a 
presentiment  of  the  future,  prlmufn  posuit  earn 
{causam)  de  qua  inodo  dlxl^  quae  orta  esset  eoc 
praesensioue  rerutn  futurdruin, 

2.  He  says  that  he  sees  what  (as  he  alleges)  I  see,  dlcit  se 

videt^e  ea  quae  videatn  {quae  video  would  mean,  what 
I  see  in  fact) . 

a.  Follow  sequence  of  tenses.  —  <J.   —  through. — c.  Genitive. 


Intermediate  Clauses.  I2l 

3.  I  come  to  see  what  you  see,  venio  ut  videam  ea  quae 

tu  videds  (or  vides). 

4.  For  what  can  be  so  plain  as  that  there  is  some  Divinity,  by 

whom  these  things  are  governed?  quid  enhn  potest 
esse  tarn  perspicuum  quam  esse  aliquod  nufneUf 
quo  haec  regantur? 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  He  came  that  he  might  see  the  games,  which  then  were 
going  on.  —  2.  He  came  that  he  might  see  the  games  that  were 
going  on.  —  3.  I  wish  to  cross  the  river,  while  you  will  stay  in 
the  camp.  —  4.  I  wish  to  cross  the  river  while  you  stay  in  the 
camp.  —  5.  I  have  received  the  letter  which  you  sent. —  6.  If 
I  had  not  received  the  letter  that  you  sent,  I  should  have  re- 
mained in  the  city.  —  7.  I  have  read  t-lie  book  which  was  given 
to  me.  —  8.  I  fear  I  shall  not  have  an  opportunity  of  reading 
the  book  that  was  given  to  me.  —  9,  He  was  prevented  by  his 
state-of-health  from  eating  the  oysters  he  bought." — 10.  I  see 
that.the  man  of  whom  you  speak  is  present. — 11.  He  said  that  he 
came  as  soon  as  he  saw  me.  —  12.  We  understand  that  the  city 
which  we  seek  is  distant. —  13.  They  understood  that  the  enemy 
whom  they  were  pursuing  were  not  far  distant.  —  14.  He  under- 
stood that  the  enemy  whom  he  had  defeated  were  retreating.  — ^ 
15.  He  understood  that  the  enemy,  whom  he  had  not  seen, 
were  approaching. 

Translate  into  liatin. 

1.  Would  that  I  may  see  that  day  when  I  may  give  you 
thanks  because  you  have  compelled  me  to  live. 

2.  Not  to  know  what  happened  before  you  were  born, — 
this  is  to  be  always  a  boy. 

3.  Men  pitied  not  more  the  punishment  than  the  crime  by 
which  they  had  deserved  punishment. 

4.  I  would  rather  he  had  not  given  him  so  great  strength, 
than  that  he  should  resist  him  now  [that  he  is  grown]  so  strong. 

a.   Pluperfect. 


122  Latin   Coinposition. 

5.  I  have  sent  Antonius  to  you,  a  brave  r:  .n  and  especially 
trusted  by  me,  that  you  might,  if  it  should  ?  em  good  to  you, 
deliver  to  him  the  cohorts  ;  in  order  that,  whi  .  the  time  of  year 
was  suitable,  I  might  be  able  to  perform  some  operation. 

6.  Nature  leads  [us]  to  favor  those  who  are  entering  upon 
the  same  perils  which  we  have  passed  through. 

7.  What  great  and  earnest  orator,  when  he  wished  to  make 
the  judge  angry  with  his  adversary,  ever  hesitated  on  this  ac- 
count, —  because  he  did  not  know  what  anger  was,  whether  a 
fervor  of  the  mind,  or  the  desire  of  punishing  a  grievance  ? 

8.  Poets  wish  each  his  own  work"  to  be  examined  by  the 
public,  in  order  that,  if  any  thing  shall  be  censured  by  many,  it 
may  be  corrected. 

9.  I  informed  Deiotarus  that  there  did  not  seem  to  be  [any] 
reason  why  he  should  be  absent  from  his  kingdom. 

10.  I  confess  that  I  have  zealously  followed  those  [pursuits] 
from  which  true  glory  could  arise. 

11.  I  thought  that  I  ought  to  lead  the  army  through  that  dis- 
trict of  Cappadocia  which  touched  upon  Cilicia. 

12.  He  is  of  opinion  that  there  are  gods,  because  it  is  neces- 
sary that  there  should  be  some  excellent  nature,  tlian  which 
there  is  nothing  better. 

13.  When  we  call  the  fruits  "Ceres,"  and  wine  "Liber,"  we 
use,  to  be  sure,  a  customary  manner  of  speech ;  but  do  you 
think  any  one  so  insane  as  to  believe  that  that  which  he  eats  is 
a  god  ? 

Lesson  65. 

Dependent  Conditional  Clauses. 

\_Compare  Lesson  27.] 

In  the  case  of  Conditional  Clauses  in  Indirect  Dis- 
course, the  following  points  are  to  be  observed  :  — 

a.    Follow  the  rule  of  Sequence  of  Tenses  {Lesson  20),  noticing 
a,  quisque  following  the  reflexive :  see  Lesson  33. 


Depen  -ent  Conditional  Clauses.  123 

also  whether  a  verb  r  complete  or  incomplete  action  is  required. 
Thus  —  \ 

He  promises  to  co  ,*«  if  they  wish,  pollicetur  se  venturum 

si  velint  (Dii  -jct,  veniam  si  voletis) . 
He   had   given   orders   that    unless    lie   should   arrive,    &c., 
edlxerat  nist  advefiisset,  etc.  (Direct,  nisi  advenero), 

b.  In  a  condition  f,ontra?y  to  fact,  the  dependent  clause  (^pro- 
tasis) remains  unchanged,  while  the  principal  clause  {apodosis)  is 
represented  by  the  future  participle  with  fuisse  (see  Lesson  27.  h). 
Thus  — 

I  declare  that  if  jou  had  done  this  you  would  have  received 
praise,  dio  si  haec  fecisses  laudem  te  accepturiim 
fuisse  (Direct,  si  haec  fecisses  latidem  accepisses). 

He  said  he  could  if  he  had  wished,  dixit  si  volulsset 
futurum  fuisse  ut  posset  {si  voluisset  potuisset) . 

Note.  —  These  two  constructions  —  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect 
subjunctive  in  future  conditions  after  a  past  tense,  and  the  future 
infinitive  with  fuisse  in  the  apodosis  of  conditions  contrary  to  fact 

—  are  among  the  most  common  subordinate  constructions  in  Indi- 
rect Discourse.  For  the  Subjunctive  representing  the  Imperative, 
see  Less 071  27. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  If  you  are  well,  I  am  glad.  —  2.  Be  assured  that  if  you 
are  well,  I  am  glad.  —  3.    I  said  that  if  he  was  well,  I  was  glad. 

—  4.  If  you  should  do  rightly,  you  would  be  praised.  —  5.  Re- 
member that  if  you  should  do  rightly,  you  would  be  praised.  — 
6.  We  reminded  them  that  if  they  should  do  rightly,  they  would 
be  praised.  —  7.  I  told  them  that  if  they  had  done  rightly,  I 
should  have  praised  them.  —  8.  We  said  that  we  should  have 
wondered  if  it  had  been  otherwise.  —  9.  We  know  that  if 
you  had  been  here,  you  would  have  approved  our  designs.  — 
10.  They  declared  that  if  hostages  had  not  been  given,  they 
should  have  laid  waste  the  country. 

fe  Translate  into  ILatin. 

»  I.  He  understood  that,  if  he  should  summon  the  legions  to 
the  province,  they  would  contend  in  battle  on  the  march  in  his 

absence  (he  being  absent) . 


124  Latin  Composition. 

2.  Now  I  wish  that  you  would  persuade  yourself  of  this 
{sic)y  that  if  reference  is  made  to  the  Senate  concerning  these 
matters,  I  shall  think  that  the  highest  praise  is  awarded  to  me, 
if  you  assent  {comprobo)  by  your  verdict  [to]  the  honor  paid 
me  {mens). 

3.  He  sees  that,  if  the  choice  of  accusing  is  transferred  from 
boys  of  rank,  whom  he  has  -hitherto  eluded,  to  brave  and  re- 
spected men,  he  cannot  lord  it  [any]  longer  in  the  trials. 

4.  They  say  that  they  wish  to  speak  with  Caesar  concerning 
most  important  matters,  if  an  opportunity  should  be  given  them. 

5.  The  same  one  says  that,  if  there  are  not  gods,  there  is 
nothing  in  all  nature  better  than  man ;  but  that  any  man  should 
think  this  —  that  there  is  nothing  better  than  man  —  he  judges 
is  the  greatest  arrogance. 

Epistle. 

Cicero  to  his  Attic  us. 

I  am  eagerly  waiting  for  your  advice.  I  fear  that  I  am  absent 
[at  a  time]  when  it  were  more  honorable  for  me  to  be  present : 
I  dare  not  come  without-special-reason.  Of  Antony's  move- 
ments {iter)  I  hear  somewhat  {nescio  quid)  otherwise  than  as  I 
wrote  to  you.  Therefore,  I  wish  you  would  explain  every  thing, 
and  send  me  definite  [tidings] .  Of  the  rest,  what  shall  I  say  to 
you?  I  burn  with  zeal  for  history  —  for  your  encouragement 
stimulates  me  incredibly  —  which  indeed  can  neither  be  begun 
nor  accomplished  without  your  aid.  Therefore  we  will  consult 
together  upon  this  at  least.  '  At  present  I  wish  you  would  write 
to  me  in  whose  consulship  (abl.  abs.)  Caius  Fannius,  son  of 
Marcus,  was  tribune  of  the  people.  I  think  {videor  mihi)  I 
have  heard  in  the  censorship  of  Publius  Africanus  and  Lucius 
Mummius. 

Dialogue. 

Theopropides.   Well,  Tranio,  what's  going  on  ? 

Tranio.  The  country-people  are  coming  from  the  country : 
Philolaches  will  be  here  at  once. 

Th.  By  Pollux,  he  comes  in  good  time  for  me.  I  am  of 
opinion  that  this  neighbor  [of]  ours  is  a  bold  and  bad  man. 

Tr.    How  so? 


The  English  Potential,  125 

Th.   Because  he  says  he  does  not  know  you. 

Tr.    Says  not? 

Th.  And  that  you  never  gave  him  a  [single]  coin  of  money. 

Tr.  Go  away,  —  you  are  chaffing  me,  I  am  sure.  He  doesn't 
deny  [it]. 

Th.   What  now? 

Tr.  I  know  you're  joking  now ;  for  he,  I  am  sure,  doesn't 
deny  [it]. 

Th.  Yes,  indeed,  by  Pollux,  he  denies  [it]  up  and  down  ; 
and  [says]  that  he  didn't  sell  this  house  to  Philolaches. 

Tr.  Well,  now,  did  he  deny  that  money  was  given  him,  I  beg 
[to  know]  ? 

Th.  Nay,  he  promised  to  give  me  an  oath,  if  I  wished,  that 
he  neither  sold  this  house,  nor  was  money  given  him. 

Lesson  66. 

The  English  Potential. 

The  Potential  Mood  is  a  name  often  given,  in  Eng- 
lish, to  any  form  of  a  verb  which  is  constructed  with 
the  aid  of  may^  can^  musty  mighty  cozcld,  wouldy  or 
should. 

But  these  words  are  used  with  great  variety  and 
laxity,  and  give  rise  to  many  ambiguities.  When  used 
simply  as  auxiliaries,  the  verb  they  form  is  a  genuine 
subjunctive  ;  but  they  are  very  commonly  principal 
verbs,  in  which  case  the  verb  depending  upon  them 
is  in  the  infinitive. 

A.  —  As  A  Principal  Verb. 

a.  May  denotes  permission  ;  Latin,  licet :  as, 

You  may  (have  leave  to)  come,  licet  tihi  venire, 

b.  Might  has  the  same  meaning,  being  the  past  tense  of  may ; 
but  by  a  peculiar  idiom,  when  used  in  this  way,  it  is  followed  by  the 
Perfect  Infinitive  in  English  :  as. 

You  might  have  come,  licuit  tihi  venire. 


126  Latin  Composition. 

Remark.  —  May  and  might  are  also  used  to  express  power  or 
possibility,  and  are  then  rendered  by  possum  :  as, 

It  may  be  so,  potest  ita  esse; 

He  might  have  come,  potuit  venire. 

This  last  expression  in  English  may  mean  either,  he  had  perinis- 
sion  (licuit) ,  or  he  had  it  iii  his  power  (potuit) . 

Might,  with  Present  Infinitive,  is  used  in  the  apodosis  of  con- 
ditional sentences  assumed  to  be  false  :  as, 

Ht  might  come  (if  circumstances  were  otherwise),  posset  Venire, 

c.  Can  and  Could  express  power,  and  are  translated  by  pos- 
sum :  as, 

I  can  do  this,  possum  hoc  facer e  ; 

Could  often,  like  inight,  takes  the  Perfect  Infinitive  to  express 
past  time,  and  uses  the  Present  Infinitive  in  either  member  of  a  con- 
ditional sentence  assumed  as  false  :  as, 

I  could  do  (or  could  have  doue)  this,  potul  hoc  facere, 
I  should  do  this  if  I  could  (but  I  cannot),  hoc  facer etn  si 
possern, 

d.  Would  and  Should  are  occasionally  used  as  principal  verbs  ; 
would,  like  will,  expresses  a  strong  determination,  and  is  rendered 
by  volo :  as, 

He  WILL  go,  vult  Ire;    He  would  ^q^  voluit  Ire, 
He  would  if  he  could,  vellet  si  2>osset, 
He  might  if  he  would,  posset  si  vellet. 

Shoidd  is  present,  expressing  obligation,  and  may  be  rendered  by 
oportet :  as. 

He  should  not  return,  non  oportet  eurn  redlre. 

Shall  also  is  sometimes  used  in  a  similar  way,  in  a  future  obliga- 
tion, amounting  almost  to  compulsion:  as,  he  shall  go ;  i.e.,  /  will 
make  him  go.     So  with  the  Future  Imperative  :  as, 

Thou  Shalt  not  steal,  ne  facito  furtuni. 


The  English  Potential.  127 

e.  Must  and  Ought  are  likewise  principal  verbs.  Must  is  ren- 
dered by  the  gerundive,  which  is  always  passive  :  as, 

We  must  wait  for  the  consul,  consul  exspectandus  est 

[nobis'] . 
We  must  flight  (fighting  must  be  done),  pugnandum  est. 

Ought  is  either  debeo  or  the  impersonal  oportet ;  but  for  past 
lime  the  English  uses  the  Perfect  Intinitive,  just  as  for  might  and 
could:  as. 

He  ought  to  have  done  this,  debuit  hoc  facere,  or  opov" 
tult  eiiin  hoc  facer e. 

B.  —  As  Auxiliaries. 

a.  May  and  Might  express  purpose  in  final  clauses,  and  are 
rendered  by  the  Present  and  Imperfect  Subjunctive  :  as, 

He  comes  that  he  may  see,  venit  ut  videat ; 
He  came  that  he  might  see,   venit  ut  videret. 

Might  is  also  used  in  softened  assertions  :  as, 

One  might  believe,  credat  qiiispiam, 

b.  Can  and  Could  are  very  rare  in  this  use,  but  are  occasionally 
the  equivalents  of  a  subjunctive  of  softened  assertion:  as, 

I  could  wish,  velim  or  vellein ; 
»Tiat  can  I  say?  quid  dlxerim. 

c.  Would  is  used  in  indirect  discourse,  to  express  an  action 
which  is  future  in  relation  to  a  verb  in  past  time  on  which  it  depends ; 
it  is  rendered  by  the  Future  Infinitive  :  as, 

He  said  that  he  would  come  or  would  have  come,  dixit  se 
ventu7^uin  esse  or  fuisse. 

d.  Should  and  Would  are  used  in  conditional  sentences  refer- 
ring indistinctly  to  future  time,  —  in  the  protasis,  should;  in  the 
apodosis,  should  (like  shall)  for  the  first  person,  would  (like  will) 
for  the  second  and  third.  In  this  use  they  are  rendered  by  the  Pres- 
ent Subjunctive :  as, 

If  he  should  do  so  I  should  rejoice,  si  ita  faclat  (jaudeam. 
You  would  rejoice,  gaudeds. 


128  Latiit   Composition, 

Should  have  and  woidd  have^  in  the  apodosis  of  conditions 
assumed  as  false,  and  rendered  by  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  :  as, 

I  should  have  come  if  I  could,  venissem  si  potuissem» 

Should  and  would,  like  might,  can,  and  could,  may  be  used  for 
implied  conditions :  as. 

Why  should  I  go  ?  quid  earn  ? 
One  would  commend,  lauddveris. 

C.  —  Recapitulation. 

a.  May  expresses  — 

1 .  Permission,  —  licet,  with  dative  and  infinitive. 

2.  Possibility,  —  possum,  with  infinitive. 

3.  Purpose,  —  ut,  with  present  subjunctive. 

b.  Might  expresses  — 

1.  Permission; 

2.  Possibility:  —  when  followed  by  perfect  infinitive  in  English, 
licuit  or  potuit  with  infinitive ;  when  followed  by  present  infinitive 
in  English,  possem,  expressing  possibility  in  a  supposition  assumed 
as  false. 

3.  Purpose,  —  ut  with  imperfect  subjunctive. 

4.  Softened  assertion. 

c.  Can  and  Could  express  — 

1.  Power,  —  possum  with  infinitive. 

2.  Softened  assertion. 

d.  Would  expresses  — 

1 .  Determination,  —  volui  or  vellem. 

2.  Future  time  in  indirect  discourse  (the  future  infinitive  depend- 
ing on  a  past  verb). 

3  Apodosis  of  future  time,  —  present  subjunctive,  second  and 
third  persons. 

4.  Apodosis  of  past  time,  condition  assumed  as  false,  —  pluper- 
fect subjunctive,  second  and  third  persons. 

5.  Softened  assertion. 

e.  Should  expresses  — 

1.  Obligation,  —  oportet  or  decet. 

2.  Protasis  of  future  time,  —  present  subjunctive. 


The  English  Potential,  129 

3.  Apodosis  of  future  time,  —  present  subjunctive,  first  person. 

4.  Apodosis  of  past  time,  false  conaition, — pluperfect  subjunc- 
tive, first  person. 

5.  Softened  assertion. 

Oral  Exercises. 

I.  You  may  go.  —  2.  You  must  go.  —  3.  You  ought  to  go. 
—  4.  You  might  go  if  you  were  well.  —  5.  You  might  have 
gone.  —  6.  You  might  have  gone  if  you  had  wished.  —  7.  Who 
would  go  into  such  (so  great)  perils  ?  —  8.  I  wish  Caius  were 
present.  —  9.  I  wish  Caius  might  be  present.  —  10.  What  could 
I  do  ?  —  II.   You  could  conquer  if  you  would  fight. 

Translate  into  Liatin. 

1.  They  begged  nothing  else  but  that  they  might  with  their 
lips  receive  the  last  breath  of  their  sons. 

2.  I  ought  to  defend  his  safety  no'  less  than  mine. 

3.  Here  it  might  be  recognized  how  much  protection  men 
have  in  firmness  of  soul. 

4.  You  both  refused  what  you  ought  not  [to  have  refused], 
and  received  what  you  had-rio-right  [to  receive]. 

5.  The  one  does  not  dare  to  inform  us  why  he  is  called  a 
commander ;  the  other  must  in  a  few  days  be  ashamed  to  dare. 

6.  It  was  answered  on  the  other  side  that  Aulus  Varro 
offered  to  come  on  the  next  day  to  a  conference,  and  that  he 
(the  same  one)  would  see  how  ambassadors  might  come  in 
safety  and  declare  what  they  wished. 

Anecdotes. 

I.  The  physician  of  Pyrrhus,  king  of  the  Epirots,  came  to 
Fabricius,  general  of  the  Romans,  and  promised  to  give  poison 
to  Pyrrhus,  if  a  reward  which  should  be  worth  his  while  should 
be  paid  him.  But  Fabricius,  thinking  that  his  victory  had  no 
need  of  such*  a  crime,  informed-against  the  physician  to  the 
king,  and  by  the  merit  of  this  good-faith  drove  ^  Pyrrhus  to  seek 
the  friendship  of  the  Romans. 

a.  Use  the  relative  qui  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence, —  quod  faci?ius,  — 
b.  Lit.,  deserved  that  he  drove. 


130  Lati7i  Composition. 

2.  Themistocles,  leader  of  the  Athenians,  when  he  saw  that 
it  was  advantageous  to  the  Greeks  to  contend  in  the  straits  of 
Salamis  against  the  multitude  of  ships  of  Xerxes,  and  could  not 
persuade  his  [fellow]  citizens  of  this  {id),  brought  it  about  by 
craft  that  the  Greeks  were  forced  by  the  barbarians  to  their  own 
advantage  (plur.).  For,  feigning  treachery,  he  sent  [a  person] 
to  Xerxes  to  disclose  that'  his  countrymen  were  deliberating 
about  flight,  and  that  matters  would  be  harder  for  him,  if  he 
should  attack  the  states  one  by  one,  by  siege.  And  by  this  means 
he  brought-it-to-pass,  first  that  the  army  of  the  barbarians  was 
kept  from  rest,  since  they  were  all  night  at  their  post  of  guard ; 
in  the  next  place,  that  his  own  men  fought  with  fresh  strength 
with  the  barbarians,  [who  were]  worn  out  by  watching,  [and]  in 
a  narrow  place,  as  he  had  wished,  where  Xerxes  could  not  use 
the  multitude  in  which  he  had  the  advantage. 

Lesson  67. 

Further  Uses  of  the  Eelatiye. 

In  the  use  of  Relative  Clauses,  the  following  points 
remain  to  be  observed  :  — 

a.  The  Relative  often  stands  for  a  Demonstrative  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  sentence  for  the  purpose  of  connecting  the  sentence  closely 
with  the  preceding.  In  such  cases  it  is  often  best  to  supply  a  con- 
junction in  English.     Thus  — 

But  when  Ariovistus  had  caught  sight  of  them,  quos  cum 
Ariovistus  conspeocisset, 

b.  The  neuter  quod,  used  adverbially,  often  begins  a  sentence, 
followed  by  si,  and  may  be  best  rendered  but,  now,  &c. :  as, 

KoTV  if  the  moon  is  a  goddess,  then  the  morning  star,  too, 
quod  si  Luna  dea  est,  ergo  etia^n  Lucifer, 

c.  When  a  relative  clause  has  another  subordinate  clause  de- 
pending upon  it,  the  Relative  may  stand  in  that  clause,  and  be 
understood  in  its  own  :  as, 


Ftirther  Uses  of  the  Relative.  131 

I  had  been  one  who,  although  it  was  permitted  me  to  receive 
greater  fruits,  did  not  hesitate,  is  fueram,  cut  cum 
liceret  mdjores  fructus  capere,  non  dubitdverim 
(for  qui,  cum  inihi  liceref). 

Translate  into  iLatin. 

1.  These  two  points  remain  to  me  from  your  subdivision. 
And  concerning  these,  if  it  seems  [good]  to  you,  I  think  we 
should  discuss  more  thoroughly. 

2.  There  are  many  monuments  of  your  mercy,  but  chiefly  the 
unharmed-condition  (plur.)  of  those  to  whom  you  have  given 
safety.  And  if  these  things  are  glorious  in  private  persons,  much 
more  shall  they  be  recounted  in  [regard  to]  kings. 

3.  Now  if  I  pushed  myself  in  that  direction,  I  should  cer- 
tainly find  at  once  some  way  of  resisting. 

4.  I  attempted-to-satisfy  (imperf.)  the  people  by  purchase, 
and  if  this  had  been  arranged  car efuWy,  I  thought  the  rabble  of 
the  city  could  be  withdrawn,  and  the  solitude  of  Italy  made- 
populous. 

5.  What  shall  I  say  of  myself,  who  cannot  be  relieved, 
although  (///)  every  thing  (omnia)  should  happen  to  me  which 
I  wish? 

6.  He  was  informed  that  all  the  Belgians,  who7?i  we  had 
shown  to  be  the  third  part  of  Gaul,  were  conspiring  against  the 
Roman  people. 

7.  Therefore  but-few  come  to  old  age,  [but]  if  this  {quod) 
did  not  so  happen,  we  should  live''  both  better  and  more  pru- 
dently. 

8.  That  is  an  old  law  of  the  genuine  and  true  friendship 
which  now  for  a  long  time  I  have  had  with  him,  that  friends 
always  wish  the  same  thing ;  nor  is  there  any  surer  bond  of 
friendship  than  the  harmony  and  union  of  plans  and  wills. 

9.  As  to  the  people,  —  he  who  either  envies  or  favors  is 
always  a  partial  judge  of  dignity. 

10.    He  forbade  a  publican  or  the  slave  of  a  publican  to  be 

a.   Impersonal. 


132  Latin  Composition. 

in-the-town  {ihi^  in  which  he  himself  was,  or  to  which  he  was 
coming. 

11.  I  entreated  Claudia,  your  wife,  and  your  sister  Mucia,  to 
'deter  him  from  that  act  of  injustice. 

12.  I  came  to  Brundisium,  April  17.  On  that  day  your  boys 
gave  me  a  letter  from  you,  and  other  boys  the  third  day  after 
that  day  (gen.)  brought  me- another  letter. 

13.  As  to  your  calling  {quod  vocas)  me  to  life,  you  accom- 
plish one  thing,  that  I  withhold  my  hands  from  myself  ;  the 
other  thing  you  cannot,  that  I  should  not  repent  our  decision 
and  [my]  life. 

14.  Each  ought  to  be  contented  with  that  [amount]  of  time 
which  is  given  to  him  for  living. 

Lesson  68. 

Supplementary  Exercises. 

1.— Epistle. 

I  WRITE  you  this  as  I  recline  in  the  very  villa  of  Scipio  Afri- 
canus,  after  adoring  his  shades  and  the  casket  which  I  suspect 
to  be  the  tomb  of  the  great  {tantus)  man.  His  soul  indeed,  I 
am  persuaded,  has  returned  into  heaven,  from  which  it  was ; 
not  because  he  led  great  armies,  —  for  these  the  mad  Cambyses 
also  had,  —  but  on  account  of  his  excellent  moderation  and 
piety,  more  admirable  in  him  when  he  left  his  country  than  when 
he  defended  it :  either  Scipio  must  {debeo)  be  wanting  to  Rome, 
or  Rome  without  liberty.  ^^  In  nothing,"  he  said,  "  do  I  wish  to 
detract  from  the  laws  and  institutions.  Let  right  be  equal  among 
all  citizens.  Make  use  of  my  services  without  me,  my  country. 
I  have  been  to  thee  a  cause  of  liberty,  I  will  be  also  a  proof  [of 
it].     I  go  forth,  if  I  have  grown  more  than  is  well  for  thee." 

Why  should  I  not  admire  this  greatness  of  mind,  with  which 
he  departed  into  voluntary  exile,  and  disburdened  the  state  ? 
Therefore  great  pleasure  came  upon  me  as  I  reflected-on  Scipio's 
customs  and  ours  :  in  this  corner  that  dread  of  Carthage,  to 
whom  Rome  owes  that   {quod)   she  was  captured  only  once, 


Supplementary  Exercises.  133 

washed  his  body,  weary  with  rustic  labors.  For  he  exercised 
himself  witli  labor,  and,  as  the  ancient "  custom  was,  he  in  person 
(ipse)  subdued  the  earth. 

3.  —  Anecdote. 

So  many  things  are  going  on  at  Rome,  that  those  which  take 
place  in  the  provinces  are  scarcely  heard  of.  I  do  not  fear  that 
I  shall  seem  to  arrogate  any  thing  to  myself,  if  I  speak  of  my 
quaestorship.  For  however  brilKant  it  was,  nevertheless  I  think 
that  I  have  since  held  the  greatest  commands  in  such  a  way  (I 
have  been  such  {is)  in  the  greatest,  &c.),  that  there  is  not  so 
much  glory  to  be  sought  from  the  reputation  of  my  quaestorship. 
But  yet  I  am  not  afraid  that  any  one  will  dare  to  say  that  any- 
one's qusestorship  in  Sicily  was  either  more  renowned  or  more 
popular.  At  that  time,  I  thought  that  men  talked  of  nothing 
else  at  Rome  but  of  my  qusestorship..  Therefore  I  came  away 
with  this  hope,  that  I  thought  the  Roman  people  would  offer 
every  thing  to  me  of  their  own  accord.  But  when  by  chance  in 
those  days,  for  the.  sake  of  taking  a  journey,  on  my  way  (dece- 
dens)  from  the  province,  I  had  come  by  chance  to  Puteoli, 
when  very  many  fashionable  men  are  accustomed  to  be  in 
that  neighborhood  (Joed),  I  almost  lost  my  balance,  when  some 
one  had  asked  me  on  what  day  I  had  gone  from  Rome,  and 
whether  there  was  any  thing  new.  When  I  had  answered  him^ 
that  I  was  on  my  way  from  my  province,  "Yes,  to  be  sure, 
by  Hercules,"  says  he,  "  from  Africa,  as  I  think."  Already 
rather-offended,  I  say  to  him  disdainfully  :  '^  No,  indeed ;  from 
Sicily."  Then  one,  as  [one]  who  knew  every  thing,  said,  "  How, 
don't  you  know  that  he  was  quaestor  at  Syracuse?  "  In-brief,  I 
left  off  being  offended,  and  pretended  that  I  was  one  of  those 
who  had  come  to  the  baths. 

3.  —  Anecdote. 

Thence  they  came  to  Sidon,  a  city  renowned  for  [its]  antiquity 
and  the  fame  of  its  founders.  Hephaestion  was  permitted  to 
estabhsh  as  king  [the  one]  of  the  Sidonians  whom  he  should 

a.   to  the  ancients.  —  b.   Lesson  58. 


134  Latin   Composition. 

judge  most  worthy  of  that  rank.  The  hosts  of  Hephaestion  were 
young  men  distinguished  among  their  countrymen ;  who,  when 
an  opportunity  of  reigning  was  offered  them  {sibi),  said  that 
no  one,  according  to  the  custom  of  the  country,  was  admitted 
to  that  rank,  unless  born  of  royal  stock.  And  they  decide  that 
no  one  is  preferable  to  (^potior  quam)  a  certain  Abdalonymus," 
connected  with  the  royal  stock,  but  on  account  of  poverty  culti- 
vating a  garden  in  the  suburbs  with  slender  profit.  The  cause 
of  his  ^  poverty  was  honesty ;  and,  intent  upon  his  daily  work, 
he  did  not  hear  the  uproar  of  arms  which  had  shaken  all  Asia. 

Suddenly  then  they  entered  his  garden  with  the  insignia  of 
royal  apparel.  Then,  after  saluting  him ""  king,  one  of  them  said  : 
"  You  must  exchange  that  filth  for  this  suit  of  raiment  which  you 
see  in  my  hands.  Take  the  spirit  of  a  king,  and  carry  that  self- 
restraint  of  yours  into  that  fortune  of  which  you  are  worthy.  And 
when  you  sit  upon  the  royal  throne,  master  of  the  life  and  death 
of  all  citizens,  do  not  forget  this  condition  in  which  —  nay,  by 
Hercules,  on  account  of  which  —  you  receive  the  royalty." 

The  king  ordered  him  straightway  to  be  admitted,  and  look- 
ing upon  him  for  a  long  time,  said  :  "  The  bearing  of  your  body 
is  not  inconsistent  with  the  fame  of  your  race  ;  but  I  should  like 
to  know  by  what  patience  you  have  endured  poverty."  Then  he 
said,  '^  May  I  be  able  to  endure  royalty  with  the  same  temper  ! 
These  hands  sufficed  for  my  needs.  To  him  who  had  nothing 
(part.),  nothing  was  wanting." 

4.  —  Epistle. 

Caius  Pliny  to  his  Septicius  Clarus. 

Ho,  you  promise  [to  come]  to  dinner,  and  don't''  come. 
Judgment  shall  be  pronounced,  —  you  shall  pay  costs  to  a 
penny,  and  that  not  {nee  id)  trifling.  There  were  prepared  a 
head-of-lettuce  apiece,  three  snails  apiece,  two  eggs  apiece, 
olives,  beets,  gourds,  onions,  a  thousand  other  things  no  less 

a.  After  q2ia?n  in  indirect  discourse  the  construction  of  the  Accusative  with 
the  Infinitive  is  usually  continued.  —  b.  =  to  him. —  c.  =  he  having  been 
saluted.  —  d.  And  not,  negue. 


Compa7'ative  Forms  of  Speech.  135 

elegant.  You  would  have  heard  comedians  or  a  reader  or  a 
harper  or  —  such  {quae)  [is]  my  liberahty  —  all  [of  these] .  But 
you  preferred  oysters,  tripe,  sea-urchins,  and  the  Cadiz-beauties" 
with  nobody-knows-who  {nescio  quis).  You  shall  suffer  punish- 
ment —  I  don't  say  what.  You  have  done  rudely ;  you  have 
grudged  —  I  am  inchned  to  think  {nescio  afi)  yourself — at  any 
rate  me,  but  yet  yourself  too.  How  much  we  should  have 
sported,  laughed,  studied  !  You  can  dine  more  showily  with 
many,  nowhere  more  gaily,  more  simply,  freer-from-restraint. 
In  fine,  make-a-trial,  and  unless  hereafter  you  excuse  yourself 
rather  to  others,  excuse  [yourself]  to  me  always.     Farewell. 

Lesson  69. 

Comparative  Forms  of , Speech. 

Note.  —  The  examples  below  are  chiefly  taken  (by  permission) 
from  the  list  of  "  Classified  Latin  Idioms"  prepared  by  Professor 
L.  S.  PoTWiN,  of  Western  Reserve  College,  Hudson,  O.  They  may 
be  used,  at  the  pleasure  of  the  teacher,  in  the  review  of  points 
already  considered,  or  for  practice  in  the  change  of  forms  of  expres- 
sion from  one  language  to  the  other.  The  references  are  to  the  fore- 
going Lessons,  where  the  forms  are  more  fully  illustrated. 

Differences  in  the  forms  of  expression  found  in  Latin 
and  English  may  be  classified  as  follows  :  — 

I.  —  Differences  in  the  Use  of  Words. 

In  seeking  the  equivalent  in  Latin  of  English  words 
or  phrases,  the  most  important  points  to  be  noted  are 
the  following  :  — 

I.  The  more  frequent  use  of  Dual  forms  in  Latin :  as  uter,  alter, 
neuter,  and  the  employment  of  the  comparative  in  many  cases 
where  the  superlative  is  found  in  English  :  as, 

The  augury  came  to  Remus  first  (before  Romulus),  priori  Remo  augurhwi 
venit. 

a.    Gadltanae, 


136  Latin  Composition, 

2.  The  choice  of  concrete  for  abstract  words  :  as, 

I  do  not  fear  a  bad  man's  anger,    ii7iprobuni  iratiwi  non  metuo. 

(See  further  illustrations  in  A.  &  G.'s  "  Latin  Composition,"  pp.  122,  123.) 

3.  Use  of  two  nouns  for  adjective  and  noun  {hendiadys)  :  as, 
An  eye-witness,  spectator  et  testis. 

A  shameful  disaster,  tgnominia  et  calamitas  (id.  p.  124). 

4.  Use  of  the  Adjective  for  other  forms  of  speech  :  as, 
Fear  of  the  enemy,  metus  hosfilis. 

He  was  the  first  to  do  it,  pritnus  hoc  fecit. 
He  spoke  briefly,  pauca  locutus  est. 
To  tell  many  lies,  mtdta  menth'i. 

5 .  The  double  Comparative  in  such  phrases  as  — 
More  nice  than  wise,  subtilior  quam  sapie7ttior. 

The  enemy  behaved  with  more  fury  than  discretion,  ferocius  quam  con- 
sultius  rein  hostes  gerebant. 

6.  Use  of  atque  (ac)  after  words  of  likeness  :  as, 

We   ought  to  love  our  friends  equally  with  ourselves,    amicos  aequ'e  ac 
nosmetipsos  dtligere  deb'emus. 

7.  Vei-bal  adjective  to  be  translated  by  Participle  :  as, 
A  rolling  stone  ;    a  living  spring  ;    saxum  voliibile  ;  fons  vivus. 

8.  Precision  in  the  use  of  Pronouns,  especially  of  the  Reflexive 
and  Intensive  :  Lesson  49. 

9.    Use  of  Demonstratives,  especially  ipse,  idem:  Gr.  §  195. 

10.  The  Relative  for  Demonstrative  and  Connective  :  Lesson  50. 
Compare  the  following :  — 

Do  nothing  as  to  which  you  are  in  doubt  whether  it  is  right  or  wrong, 
nihil  egeris  quod  dubitas  aequuifi  sit  an  imquum. 

1 1 .  Indefinite  Pronouns  (often  taking  the  place  of  the  Article  in 
English)  :  Lesson  ^2. 

12.  Form  of  Reply  (for  *'  yes  "  or  *'  no  ")  :  Lesson  3. 

13.  Certain  uses  of  Negatives  (compare  Lesson  36.  d)  :  as, 

No  poet  or  orator  ever  said  that,   neino  umquam  neque  poeta  neque  orator 

illud  dixit. 
Flattery  is  unworthy  not  only  of  a  friend  but  (not)  even  of  a  free  man, 

adsentatio  nd?i  7nodo  aimed  sed  ne  Itbero  quidem  digna  est. 
He  says  he  was  not  there,    negat  se  adfuisse. 
I  fear  he  will  not  come,    vereor  ut  veniat. 


Comparative  Forms  of  Speech,  137 

II.  —  Differences  of  Construction. 

Differences  of  syntax  may  be  classified  as  (a)  Case- 
Constructions,  {b)  Verb-Constructions,  {c)  Dependent 
Constructions. 

a.  Case-Constructions.  —  The  use  of  Cases,  in  agreement  or 
government,  has  been  fully  illustrated  in  the  foregoing  Lessons,  and 
is  supposed  to  be  familiar.  Of  those  illustrating  peculiarities  in  the 
use  of  Latin,  the  most  important  to  be  noticed  are  the  following :  — 

14.  The  Objective  Genitive,  as  corresponding  v^^ith  the  use  of 
various  prepositions  in  English  {^Lesson  38.  4). 

15.  The  Partitive  Genitive,  in  such  phrases  as  the  following:  — 

What  is  the  trouble  ?    quid  negbtii  est  ? 

Considerable  time  ;   no  delay,    aliquantum  temporis  ;  nihil  morae. 

16.  Compare  the  following  cases  of  Agreement :  — 

How  many  are  there  of  you?   quot  estis? 

I  hear  threats,  none  of  which  I  fear,   mirias  audio  quas  nullas  tinteo. 

ly.    The  Predicate  Genitive  in  such  phrases  as  — 

It  is  [the  part]  of  a  judge,  jildicis  est. 

It  is  {or^  it  would  be)  wise  to  reflect,   sapientis  est  c'ogitare  (^Lesson  31.  2). 

18.  Dative  of  Service  {^predicate  dative)  :  see  Lesson  15.  2. 

19.  Ablative  Absolute  :  Lesson  7.  b. 

20.  Locative  Constructions:  Lessons  17,  46. 

21.  Idiomatic  use  of  certain  prepositions  to  express  location  or 
direction:  as, 

I  begin  with  this,    ab  hoc  ordior. 

A  shout  was  heard  on  that  side,    clamor  ab  ilia  parte  auditus  est. 

In  front ;   on  the  flank ;   in  the  rear,    a  frottte,  a  latere,  a  tergb, 

12..    Compare  the  following  uses  of  Prepositions  :  — 
Of  a  sudden,    ex  iinprozns'o . 

To  put  money  into  a  box,   pecuniam  in  area  ponere. 
It  is  all  over  with  the  army,    actum  est  de  exercitu. 
To  your  satisfaction,    ex  tud  seiztentia. 
So  much  for  this,    de  hac  re  hdctenus. 
I  desire  it  with  all  my  heart,    ex  animo  hoc  cupio. 
They  differ  widely  from  one  another,    multum  inter  se  differunt. 


1 3 '5  Latin  Compositioit, 

Want  increases  from  day  to  day,    inopia  in  dies  crescit. 
One  war  rose  after  another,    alind  ex  alio  bellum  ortum  est. 
It  is  for  your  interest,    in  rem  hiam  est. 

Our  ships  rode  at  anchor,    nostt'-ae  naves  in  ancoris  constiteru7it. 
While  at  play;   at  leisure,    iiiter  ludendu7n,  per  otium. 
He  was  informed  both  by  the  envoys  and  by  letter,    et  a  legat'is  et  per  lit' 
teras  certior  factus  est. 

23.  Attraction  in  the  Relative  clause:  as, 

He  sent  the  most  faithful  slave  he  had,  servum  quern  Jidelissimu}7t  habebat 

nil  sit. 
Thebes,  which  was  the  head  of  Boeotia,    T/iebae,  quod  caput  Boeotiae  erat. 

b.  Verb-Constructions.  —  The  syntax  of  Moods  and  Tenses 
has  been  exhibited  in  Lessons  19,  20,  32,  33 ;  and  of  Participles, 
&c.,  in  Lessons  34,  35.  Among  special  or  idiomatic  uses  are  to  be 
noticed  — 

24.  Reflexive  meaning  of  the  Passive  (representing  in  Latin  the 
Greek  middle  voice)  :  as, 

He  buckles  on  his  sword,  gladitim  cingitur  (compare  fratr'i  gladitmi  cingit\ 

25.  Use  of  Impersonal  expressions:  Lesson  30. 

26.  Precision  in  the  use  of  Tenses,  as  in  the  following :  — 
I  have  been  long  (and  still  am)  desiring,  jafu  pride m  cupio. 

I  might  have  gone,    \jnihi'\  ~ire  licuit  (see  Lesson  66). 
I  will  do  it  if  I  can,  faciani  st  potero  (see  Lessott  32). 

27.  The  Subjunctive  in  Indirect  (2uestions :  Lesson  28  (strictly, 
a  dependent  construction) . 

28.  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  in  expressions  of  Wish  :  Lesson  '^2>' 
I  ;  and  in  such  phrases  as, 

I  should  like  to  do  this,    hoc  facer e  velim. 

I  would  rather  you  were  here,   ??tdlle?n  adesses. 

I  wish  he  had  done  it,    velleui  hoc  fecisset. 

29.  The  Participle  for  the  Infinitive  in  description  (§  292.  ^):  as, 
I  heard  the  birds  sing,  av'es  canentes  audivi. 

Did  you  see  the  house  fall?   domumne  rueniein  vidisfi  ? 

30.  Participle  in  agreement,  for  coordinate  or  descriptive  phrase  : 
see  Lesson  34.     For  example. 

He  took  the  bridge  and  burned  it,    potitem  captuin  ijtcendit. 
He  called  the  soldiers  and  showed  them  Italy,    nfilitibus  (dat.)  vocatls 
Italiam  ostendit. 


Comparative  Forms  of  Speech.  139 

I  want  men  that  will  not  give  way  before  the  enemy,    quaero  milifes  hostir 

bus  non  cessuros. 
I  know  nothing  but  what  I  have  heard,    nihil  habeo  praeter  aud'ittijn. 
One  who  reckons  pain  the  greatest  evil  cannot  be  brave,    doldre?n  szim- 

muj?i  malum  judicans  fortis  esse  non  potest. 
Obey  no  one  unless  [he  be]  a  teacher  or  lawful  ruler,   n'emini  pai^eto  nisi 

aut  docenti  aut  legitime  hnperanti. 

31.  Certain  Gerundive  constructions:  Lesson  18,  Remarks  i  and 
2.     Examples  are  — 

I  meet  no  one  without  thanking  him,  nemifiem  convenio  qtiin  e'l  gratia s  agam.. 
He  praises  the  poets  without  understanding  them,  po'etas  latidat,  neque 

(^eos^  intellegit. 
I  have  no  doubt  about  your  being  well,    nihil  dubito  qtiin  valeas. 
Nothing  prevents  his  doing  it,    nihil  obstat  quominus  id  faciat. 
He  was  on  the  point  of  being  killed,    in  eo  erat  ut  interficer'etur. 
Far  from  being   (instead  of  being)  silent,  youcry  out,    tantum  abest  tit 

taccas  ut  cla/nes  {cldmds  cum  tacere  debeas^. 

32.  Omission  of  the  Verb  in  certain  phrases  :  as, 
They  do  nothing  but  laugh,    nihil  aliud  quam  rident. 

Compare  the  rhetorical  omission  of  the  copula,  frequent  in  Livy 
and  Tacitus. 

33.  Preference  of  personal  forms  in  the  passive  of  Indirect  Dis- 
course :   as. 

It  is  said  that  Plato  lived  to  be  an  old  man,    Plato  usque  ad  senectutem 

vixisse  dicittir. 
It  seems  we  have  done  something,    aliquid,  ut  videmur,  effecimus. 

34.  Clause  (expressed  or  implied)  after  a  Comparative  :  as, 
He  is  too  kind  to  get  angry,    dementior  est  quam  ut  (^qut)  trasct  possit. 

35.  Change  of  subject  and  predicate  in  second  member  of  a 
sentence :  as, 

Nothing  was  doing  except  to  prepare  for  war,    neque  aliud  agebatur  quavi 
bellum  appardbatu}' . 

c.  Subordinate  Constructions,  —  These  have  been  abundantly 
treated  under  the  heads  Indirect  Discourse  {^Lessons  24-29)  and 
Subordinate  Clauses  {^Lessons  53-65). 

36.  The  structure  of  Latin  is  especially  characterized  by  the 
preference  of  subordinate  to  independent  or  coordinate  expressions, 
as  may  be  seen  in  the  following  example :  — 

He   left   his  houseand  wandered  about   alone,    cum   dojuum  refiqtnsset 
{domo  relicta)  solus  vagdtus  est  (compare  under  30,  above). 


140  La  lift  Composition. 

yj.  This  is  seen  more  distinctly  by  comparing  the  involved  con- 
struction of  a  Latin  period  with  the  form  in  which  it  would  be  more 
natural  to  express  the  same  idea  in  English.     Thus  — 

I  knew  they  were  on  fire  with  rage  Atqiie  ego,  ut  zntfi  qiibs  maxinib  fii- 

and  guilt.  ,    I  saw  that  they  liad  ro7'e    et   scelere   esse  'injlammatos 

stayed  behind  at  Rome,  and  were  sciebam,  eos  nolnscum  esse  et  Rom ae 

in  the  midst  of  us.    And  so  I  spent  remansisse,  in  eo  omn'es  dies  noc- 

all  my  days  and  nights  in  feeling  fesque  consiimps'i,  id  quid  agerent, 

out  and  watching  what  they  were  quid  tJibl'irentur,  senhrem  ac  vi- 

doing,  what  they  were  attempting.  dere??i. 

III.  —  Differences  of  Idiom. 

38.  The  following  examples  will  serve  to  illustrate  some  of  the 
more  common  differences  of  idiom,  or  forms  of  expression,  which 
should  be  borne  in  mind  in  translating  from  either  language  into  the 
other.     The  list  might  be  extended  indefinitely. 

You,  your  brother,  and  I,    ego  et  tu  et  frater  tuus. 

To  demand  satisfaction;   to  make  restitution,    r'es  repetere ;  res  redder e. 

To  keep  a  promise,  Jidein  servare  ;    to  break  one's  word,  Jideju  fallere. 

It  is  worth  the  while,    operae  pretiian  est. 

He  takes  pains  to  understand,   dat  operam  ut  iutellegat. 

Let  me  know;   see  that  you  write  me,  fac  sciam  ;  fac  ad  77ie  scrtbas. 

What  does  this  mean  ?   quid  hoc  sibi  vult  ? 

I  don't  care  a  straw  for  your  promise,  prdnnssu?n  tuuvi  7ibn  Jlocc'i  facia. 

To  be  condemned  to  death,    capitis  daninari. 

The  thing  in  question,    id  de  quo  agitur. 

So  it  is  (the  case  stands  thus) ,    ita  r'es  se  habet. 

They  desire  revolution,    novas  res  cupiu7tt,  "  novis  rebus  students* 

They  refreshed  themselves,    corpora  curabant  (see  2,  above). 

He  is  intimate  with  the  Scipios,    Sctpionibus  familiariter  utitur. 

Richly  endowed  with  knowledge,   scientid  auctus. 

Promoted  to  honors,    honoribus  (abl.)  auctus. 

To  undergo  punishment;  to  receive  a  reward,  poena  affic'i;  praetnio  affict. 

I  will  not  lie,  as  they  do,    n'bn  mentiar  ut  istt  solejit. 

They  were  pinched  with  the  cold,    torridi  erant  frigore. 

In  brief;    to  be  brief,    quid  multa  ?   quid  plura  ? 

Heaven  forbid  !   D'l  meliora  !     What's  the  matter  ?  quorsus  haec? 

They  burst  into  tears,    in  lacrimas  effus'i  sunt. 

Not  to  put  too  fine  a  point  on  it,    ne  niiuis  subtiliter  dicam.    . 

I  allow  myself  to  be  imposed  upon,   verba  7nihi  dart  patior. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $!.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


^^^  17  1941 

FEB  2  3  1966  0 

8 

iNSTAOCS 

ST** '         A  ^rkCn 

fi-u    9  i3ob 

I     REC'D  LD 

SFRl=i'66"B  AM 

rtu  *  p  ^'^      '^"' 

ri 

MAR  2  4  \%mo 

^ 

-  , 

MAR  1  7  2001 

YB  4(20S 

U.C  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


Ho'iS 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


